An Analysis of Elliptical Phenomena Based on Non-Constituent Deletion

byDaisuke Hirai

B. A., Kyoto University of Foreign Studies, 1997

M. S., University of Wisconsin-River Falls, 1999

A Dissertation
Submitted forthe Degree of Doctor of Philosophy
toKansai Gaidai University
2018Acknowledgements
It is hardly a trivial task to properly acknowledge everyone who has helped me during
my research and reach this point. Without their help, this dissertation would never havecome into existence or taken shape as it is.
First and foremost, I would like to thank Yukio Oba, my thesis supervisor. He has given
me a lot of advice and constant encouragement since I was a graduate student at Nagoya
University. I am very fortunate that he invited me to study at Kansai Gaidai University
and work on this topic to complete this dissertation. It has been a great pleasure to study
under his guidance. I cannot thank him enough for reading my rough draft and giving me
a lot of comments on it.
I would also like to thank the other members of the committee, Nobuo Okada, Kansai
Gaidai University, and Sadayuki Okada, Osaka University for reading my paper and giving
me a lot of valuable comments. Their comments helped me look into more ellipsis-related
examples. This will lead me to work on another topic as a next step.
I would also like to acknowledge the past and present members of the graduate school of
Kansai Gaidai University, Jun Omune and Shota Tanaka for reading my first version of thisdissertation and their comments on it. They spent a lot of time studying with me andprovided me with a lot of insight on the current theory.
I also owe very special thanks to Howard Lasnik.

He gave me very exciting

opportunities to participate in his graduate courses at University of Maryland (UMD) from
August 2017 to August 2018.

I have benefited from his invaluable comments andinsightful suggestions on some of my unformed ideas. I am also grateful to the teachers at
UMD, Juan Uriagereka, Alex Williams, Norbert Hornstein, and Omer Preminger for theirhelpful discussions. I would also like to thank my UMD colleagues, Gesoel Mendes, Masa
Yano and Hisao Kurokami for discussions and their comments on my thesis. They mademy time in Maryland really precious and just great.
I also wish to express my gratitude to Takahiro Ono for his guidance and invitation to
studies of Linguistics. If I had not met him when I was an undergraduate student at KyotoiUniversity of Foreign Studies, my interests in Syntax and linguistics would have neverstarted.
I am also indebted to the teachers and colleagues at Nagoya University, Masachiyo
Amano, Tomoyuki Tanaka, Hiroyuki Nawata, Naoshi Nakagawa, Eiko Mizuno, Satoko
Osawa, Tomohiro Yanagi, Yuka Makita, Yasuaki Ishizaki, Shin-ichi Nimura, Hiroki
Maezawa, and Azusa Yokogoshi for their support and giving me not only a hard time but
also a good time. My life in Nagoya was tough, but I learned a lot from the classes anddiscussion with them.
Needless to say, my heartfelt thanks go to my colleagues at Kindai University, Taikyoku
Shirakawa, Koji Yoshida, Akihiro Mikami, Michiko Takahashi, Michiko Hirata, So Fujii,
Joshua Cohen, Alison Kitzman, Kimiho Izuka, Makoto Harada, and Tetsuya Kumagai.
Among them, Koji gave me very insightful comments and advice on working on this topic
and offered me several opportunities to present my early ideas of this paper at conferences.
I am also deeply grateful to Joshua for his assistance. He proofread the early versions of
this dissertation and provided me with not only stylistic modifications but also commentson the English examples in this dissertation. I would also like to thank Alison for judging
the difficult and complicated examples in this paper, which might have really bothered her
because too many wh-questions are included in them. I would also like to offer thanks to
the Chinese teachers, Kimiho and Makoto for helping me write the abstract in Chinese.
I have had the generous support and encouragement from my parents Keiji and Kayoko
Hirai for having supported me in various stages of my life. It was really hard to persuade
them to let me become a linguist. I hope this dissertation shows them how interesting
linguistics is.
Finally and most importantly, I would like to extend my indebtedness to my wife Noriko,
my daughter Riko and my son Hikaru for their endless love, understanding, support,
encouragement and sacrifice throughout my study. I can never thank them enough now
and forever.

iiTable of Contents
Acknowledgements ............................................................................................................... i
Table of Contents ............................................................................................................... iii

Chapter 1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 1

Chapter 2 Theoretical Framework &Two Approaches ................................................. 7
2. 1 Introduction ................................................................................................................. 7
2. 2 Theoretical Framework .............................................................................................. 7
2. 3 LF Copying vs PF Deletion ................................................................................... 19
2. 3. 1 LF Copying Approach: Williams (1977) -VP Deletion- ................. ............ 21
2. 3. 2 PF Deletion Approach ........................................................................................ 25
2. 3. 2. 1 PF Deletion Approach 1: Hankmer and Sag (1976) -VP Deletion – ........ 25
2. 3. 2. 2 PF Deletion Approach 2: Ross (1969) and Merchant (2001) -Sluicing- .. 28
2. 4 What Licenses Deletion ? -Parallelism- ................................................................. 32
Notes for Chapter 2 .......................................................................................................... 35

Chapter 3 On Sluicing .................................................................................................... 39
3. 1 Introduction ............................................................................................................... 39
3. 2 Empirical Facts ......................................................................................................... 41
3. 2. 1 Is PF Deletion Related to Sluicing (SS)?.......................................................... 41
3. 2. 2 Mysteries: Question .......................................................................................... 43
3. 3 The LF Copying and PF Deletion Debate Again .................................................. 46
3. 3. 1 TP-Copying (Recycling) ................................................................................... 46
3. 3. 1. 1 TP-Recycling in SS ..................................................................................... 46
3. 3. 1. 2 Some Problems with LF-Recycling .......................................................... 49iii

3. 3. 2 PF Deletion ........................................................................................................ 50
3. 3. 2. 1 Some Evidence to Support PF Deletion Approach ................................... 50
3. 3. 2. 2 PF Deletion Approach: Violation Repair by Ross (1969) and Chomsky(1972) .......................................................................................................... 52
3. 3. 2. 3 PF Deletion Approach: Violation Repair by Fox and Lasnik(2003) .......................................................................................................... 55
3. 3. 2. 3. 1 Parallelism of LF Structures and Choice Function ............................. 55
3. 3. 2. 3. 2 Problems with Fox and Lasnik’s Analysis............................................ 59
3. 3. 2. 4 PF Deletion Approach: Short Source by Marchant (2001) and Maximal
Deletion by Merchant (2008) and Hartman (2011) ................................... 60
3. 4 A Non-movement Analysis of Sluicing ................................................................... 64
3. 4. 1 Proposals: Overview .......................................................................................... 64
3. 4. 2 Abstract Question Morpheme (Q-morpheme) and Elements in situ .............. 66
3. 4. 3 Wide Scope of Wh-Phrases in situ and Indefinite Nouns Phrases: Island
Insensitivity ........................................................................................................ 76
3. 4. 3. 1 Wh-phrases .................................................................................................. 77
3. 4. 3. 2 Specificity of Indefinite Noun Phrases ...................................................... 79
3. 4. 4 Identity and Parallelism ..................................................................................... 82
3. 5 An Analysis ............................................................................................................... 88
3.6 Remaining Issues .................................................................................................... 94
3. 6. 1 Swiping ............................................................................................................... 94
3. 6. 2 The Ungrammaticality of VP Deletion with SS .............................................. 97
3. 6. 3 Contrast Type .................................................................................................... 99
3. 7 Conclusion ............................................................................................................. 100
Notes for Chapter 3 .......................................................................................................... 101

Chapter 4 On Multiple Sluicing ................................................................................... 106
4. 1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 106iv

4. 2 Previous Analyses .................................................................................................. 109
4. 2. 1 Richards (2001) ................................................................................................ 110
4. 2. 1. 1 Deletion and PF Ambiguity....................................................................... 110
4. 2. 1. 2 PF Violation is not Salvaged. ................................................................... 113
4.2.2 Lasnik (2014) ...................................................................................................... 115
4. 2. 2. 1 Rightward Movement of the Second Wh-phrase .................................... 115
4. 2. 2. 2 Where Does the Second Wh-phrase Go?.................................................. 117
4. 3 An Alternative Analysis Based on Non-Constituent Deletion ............................. 122
4. 3.1 A Non-movement Analysis of Multiple Sluicing ......................................... 122
4. 3. 1. 1 The Clause-mateness of Wh-phrases in MS? ....................................... 123
4. 3. 1. 2 Baker’s Q-morpheme Again ..................................................................... 125
4. 3. 1. 3 Unselective Binding of Indefinite Nouns in MS ..................................... 129
4. 3. 2 The Clause-mateness and Properties of the Second Wh-phrase in MS ........ 131
4. 3. 2. 1 Is MS an Instance of Gapping? ................................................................. 131
4. 3. 2. 2 The Properties of the Second Wh-phrase in MS ................................... 135
4. 3. 2. 2. 1 The Behavior of a Strong Quantifier .................................................. 135
4. 3. 2. 2. 2 . The Second Wh-phrase in MS as a Strong Quantifier ....................... 139
4. 3. 3 LF Parallelism ................................................................................................ 142
4. 3. 3. 1 LF Structural Isomorphism for VP Deletion ......................................... 143
4. 3. 3. 2 Now Multiple Sluicing ............................................................................. 147
4. 3. 4 Partial Deletion in a Syntactic Constituent .................................................... 154
4. 4 Consequences ........................................................................................................ 158
4. 5 Conclusion ............................................................................................................... 162
Notes for Chapter 4 ........................................................................................................ 162

Chapter 5 On Pseudogapping .................................................................................... 167
5. 1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 167
5. 2 Previous Analyses .................................................................................................. 170v

Chapter 1
Introduction
Language is full of mysteries. We, human beings, know our own native language andcommunicate with each other without any particular consciousness of using it. No doubt, a newlyborn baby acquires his or her language naturally within very limited time by the time they turn tobe age three or four. Therefore, it is obvious that we acquire the capacity to use a language freely
without any particular training and learning. Besides, our knowledge is highly productive and we
can understand or create extremely infinite sentences that we have never heard, seen, or uttered
before. For example, take the following sentence from The Washington Post (D1), dated onJune 8th, 2018.

(1) Alex Ovechkin tossed off his helmet and gloves early, with his Washington
Capitals less than a second away from winning the Stanley Cup.
(Khurshudyan, ‘All Champs,’ The Washington Post: June 8, 2018)

Despite not knowing who Alex Ovechkin is, what the Washington Capitals are, or even what
the Stanley Cup is, we can understand this sentence and at least imagine fairly intuitively
what was going on. That is, we have a capacity with which we can understand or create
sentences even without any experience of encountering this sentence before. This is what
Noam Chomsky calls “Poverty of Stimulus,” or “Plato’s Problem.”(2) Plato’s Problem
How can we know so much given that we have such limited evidence?
(Chomsky (1986a: xxv))

This means that knowing a language should be not knowing a lot of words, or phrases, but
having the capacity or intuition to use and understand a language, namely, the knowledge of1

the grammar of the language that we have acquired. The problem of what the capacity/
intuition or knowledge of grammar just mentioned are like, has been questioned and pursued
since the birth of the generative grammar first advocated by Chomsky (1957).
One conclusion we have reached so far is that only human beings are born with agenetically endowed capacity called, a “Language Acquisition Device (LAD).”This

device enables us to acquire a language with very limited exposure to it in our environment.
This device is considered to be “a faculty of language (FL), a component of the humanmind/brain dedicated to language” (Chomsky (2000: 89)), which is regarded as a “language
organ.” FL is not innately limited to a specific language, but it allows us to eventuallyacquire a language, depending on languages new-born babies or infants are exposed to.
Thus, LAD is also called Universal Grammar (UG), which develops, like other organs, intoa stative state.

When one is in this state, he/she is said to have the (target)

grammar/language. The model of language acquisition is roughly schematized below.

(3) Linguistic experience ➡ LAD/UG ➡ target grammar/language

The target grammar/language in (3) refers to inner grammar or internal language of thecapacity, which is called “I-language.” More specifically, the “I” here means “intentional”
or “internalized” to the capacity, differing totally from “E-language.” “E” in this casesuggests “extensional” or “externalized” to the capacity, and it is “very remote frommechanisms” (Chomsky 1988:38)). The external language, thus, is actual utterances or
usage, and has much to do with “performance of language.” This may be affected by othercognitive or environmental effects, and is not within the scope of study of the FL to explore.
Characterizing I-languages, clarifying the mechanism of language acquisition, and showing
explicitly the design of the human language capacity have been the very center of theattention and the goal which the generative grammar aims to reach.
Importantly, the generative grammar has always been pursuing true adequacy for every
proposed explanation of this problem. Thus, it is assumed that the more principled an
explanation is, the more valuable it would be. In the current framework of the generativegrammar, called the “Minimalist Program” first advocated by Chomsky (1993), “principled”
2means that adequate explanations should be consistent with biological and evolutional
aspects of human beings (Chomsky (1995, 2000, 2001, 2004, 2005, 2007, 2008, 2013,2015b)) to which we will return in the next chapter. The goal, therefore, is too far-reaching
to approach, and it surely takes a lot of load and work. However, looking very closely into
what we can see through linguistic data or empirical facts could enable us to reach the goal.
Therefore, in this paper, I would like to examine some intriguing empirical data and takeone small step toward this attractive goal.
Here are the empirical facts I would like to deal with in this paper.

In languages,

although some parts are overtly or phonologically unrealized, a certain interpretation isavailable to the silent sites. This is called “Deletion” or “Ellipsis.” (4)-(10) are typicalexamples observed in English, where the underlined sites stand for phonologically null parts.
In each example, the (a) sentences including some missing parts are all understood as the(b) sentences.

(4) Verb Phrase (VP) Deletion
a. John can read the book but Bill can’t ____.
b. John can read the book but Bill can’t read it (the book).
(5) Gappinga. Alice ate bread and Brenda ____ cakes.
b. Alice ate bread and Brenda ate cakes.
(6) Pseudogappinga. John will select me, and Bill will ____ you.
b. John will select me, and Bill will select you.
(7) Sluicing
a. Somebody just left --- Guess who ____.
b. Somebody just left --- Guess who just left.
(8) Multiple Sluicing
a. I know somebody talked to somebody, but I don’t remember who ____
to whom.

3

b. I know somebody talked to somebody, but I don’t remember who talked
to whom.
(9) Noun Phrase (NP) Deletion
a. I like John’s picture, but I don’t like Bill’s ____ very much.
b. I like John’s picture, but I don’t like Bill’s picture very much.
(10) Antecedent-Contained Deletion (ACD)
a. Henry read every book that Kelly did ____.
b. Henry read every book that Kelly (did) read.

Take a brief look at each example. The ellipsis phenomenon in (4) is called “VP Deletion,”where the verb and its object in VP after the auxiliary are deleted. The example in (5) is“Gapping,” in which case, only the verb corresponding to the one in the antecedent clauseis missing. The example (6a) indicates that the verb is unrealized with its object left intact.
Since this looks like a mixed version of VP Deletion and Gapping, this phenomenon is called“Pseudogapping.”

In (7a), referred to as “Sluicing,” the Tense Phrase (TP) (the finite

clause) following the wh-phrase in the second conjunct seems to be “sluiced.”Thefollowing example labeled (8a) is called “Multiple Sluicing,” where some elements aredeleted in the second clause, but multiple wh-phrases in the clause remain undeleted. In(9a), the corresponding noun, picture, is deleted in the object noun phrase. This is called“NP-Deletion.” Finally, the example (10a) is more mysterious than other elliptical ones,
and is called “Antecedent Contained Deletion (ACD).”

In this case, unlike the otherelliptical phenomena, the gapped sites would never be filled out with the corresponding
antecedent phrase because the antecedent structure itself includes gapped sites in it. This
causes so-called a “regress problem,” which has been attracting a lot of attention in theliterature.
Normally, all the examples in (a) above are consistently interpreted as (b), even though
there are some silent parts included in them. In order to clarify the mechanism of making
this possible, a lot of study has been conducted not only within the generative grammar, butalso interdisciplinarily with psychology and other natural sciences for more than 60 years.
The reason why this has been drawing a lot of attention is probably because scientists have4all believed that there are deep principles hidden behind the fact that native speakers canintuitively understand these examples as provided in (b). In other words, addressing thisproblem is regarded as one of the most important problems we should solve to clarify the
FL for human beings. In the course of solving this problem, linguists studying within theminimalist framework have been questioning how elliptical sentences like above are derived
and what licenses the deleted parts, and pursuing more adequate accounts. Although a lotof proposals and analyses have already been presented in various ways, it is still unknown
whether each ellipsis construction requires a different account or analysis, or to what extent
unified accounts are possible to provide. That is, we have not yet reached any satisfactory
conclusion about this problem. This paper, therefore, focuses on some of the ellipticalconstructions given above and explores how well we can explain them in more principledways. By doing this research, I would like to provide one solution to the mysteries of theFL.
This paper is organized as follows: In the next chapter, I will introduce the theoreticalframework I am assuming in this paper. In particular, I will introduce the general ideas of
the Minimalist Program that particularly, Chomsky (2001) has presented, and provide some
important theoretical assumptions. In the later sections of the chapter, we will see two
fundamental analyses of deletion phenomena: LF Copying Approach (Williams (1977)),
and PF Deletion Approach (Hankamer and Sag (1976), Ross (1969), and Merchant (2001)).
In addition, I will explore what licenses deletion in terms of parallelism.
In the chapter 3, I will provide an alternative derivation of Sluicing. I will review someprevious analyses and argue that a wh-phrase in Sluicing does not move except certain cases,
but it is bound by Baker’s (1970) Abstract Question Morpheme (Q-morpheme).

Inaddition, following Fox (2000) among others, I will suggest that deletion is possible whenthe LF structure of the elided sites is isomorphic to that of the corresponding antecedent, anddeletion operation is applied to the paralleled constituent except focus marked material(Maximal Effect of Deletion).
In the chapter 4, I would like to propose an alternative analysis of the derivation of another
mysterious deletion phenomenon, Multiple Sluicing (MS). It has not been clarified so well
how MS is derived in English which disallows multiple wh-fronting. Extending Baker’s
5Q-morpheme analysis, I will assume that just like Sluicing, wh-phrases in MS do not move
except some cases, but they are bound by the Q-morpheme. Under this assumption, I will
explore a more adequate derivation of the construction in terms of the Parallelism andMaximal Effect of Deletion.
The chapter 5 will discuss another interesting elliptical phenomenon, Pseudogapping. I
will argue, using the framework of Chomsky (2001), that the remnants in VP in theconstruction do not move, being provided with interpretation in the base position, anddeletion operation is applied in the same way as Sluicing and MS discussed in the previous
chapters.
Chapter 6 is the conclusion of this paper and includes my final remarks.

6

Chapter 2*
Theoretical Framework & Two
Approaches
2.1 Introduction
In this chapter, I would like to introduce the fundamental concept of the minimalist
program, first advocated by Chomsky (1993), which I will use to discuss the ellipticalphenomena in this paper.

Throughout the paper, I will assume that the minimalist

program, which claims that language is an optimal solution to the faculty of language,is on the right track and reliable as a working hypothesis.

Let us take a brief look at

the framework adapted in the current generative grammar.

2.2 Theoretical Framework
Before discussing some analyses of elliptical phenomena, I would like to introduce
the fundamental framework of the theory of syntax. In this paper, I will keep to theassumptions adapted in the minimalist program proposed by Chomsky (1993) andstudied more deeply by his subsequent works. Let us see some important concepts.
Linguists who study the theories of the generative grammar have been pursuing,
since its inception, more principled and more adequate explanations as required inother natural sciences. From this point of view, Chomsky (2000: 89) asks “[h]ow
well is Faculty of Language (FL) designed?” Furthermore, he questions “to what
extent is the FL an optimal solution to minimal design specifications, conditions thatmust be satisfied for language to be usable at all?” (Chomsky 2001: 1)). If the theoryof FL itself must be optimal and perfect without any unnatural assumptions or7

imperfections as natural sciences are, we will have to ask how it is related to othercognitive computations.
Obviously and naturally, expressions we create as linguistic objects have meanings
and phonological contents associated with them; otherwise, communication could
never occur between human beings. This is regarded as the “Basic Properties ofhuman languages.” In Chomsky’s words:(1) The most elementary fact about each individual’s language is that it
generates a pair of interpretations (sensorimotor (SM), conceptualintention (CI)) for each of infinitely many hierarchically structured
expressions, where SM is the link to organs of externalization (typically
articulatory-auditory) and CI is the link to the systems of thought and action.
We can refer to this virtual truism as the Basic Principle of humanlanguage, instantiated in one or another form in the brain of each language
user.
(Chomsky (2015a), (New preface in Aspects: ix, (Originally, Chomsky (1965))))This means that FL functions independently but works together with other cognitive
faculties, which is schematized in (2).

8

(2)

Cognitive Systems
Faculty of Language
Lexicon (List of words)↓
SyntaxSensory Motor

Conceptual-intention

Speech/Utterance

Meaning

Under this framework, the operation of putting together lexical elements in the mental“Lexicon,” which essentially has a set of lexical items and words, creates
hierarchically structured expressions. These expression are then mapped onto the SM
and CI, which have been traditionally called Phonological Form (PF) and Logical
Form (LF).1 The PF and LF deal with their own instructions or properties at eachinterface.

Since the SM/PF is the interface that deals with utterances, it uses

instructions related with certain temporal order and phonetic properties. The CI/LF
interprets sematic features, quatificational structures, and so on.
Suppose that FL and other cognitive systems are organized as in (2). FL as acomputational system only outputs expressions that can be read by both interfaces.
Thus, only “legible” elements should be acceptable at the interfaces. If an expression
consists of only readable elements, its derivation will be accepted, which Chomsky(1995) refers to as Convergent. If an output expression includes uninterpretableproperties, it is ruled out at the relevant interfaces, and the derivation will result in a
“Crash.” We assume, then, that an expression only converges when it contains
accessible elements. Chomsky (2000) calls this the “legibility condition.”2 It is also
assumed that this condition requires FL to provide readable expressions to the9interfaces in a perfect and optimal way. This approach is called “Strong Minimalist
Thesis (SMT),” which Chomsky (2008) refers to as:(3) [T]he “strong minimalist thesis” SMT --- which holds that language is an
optimal solution to interface conditions that FL must satisfy; that is,language is an optimal way to link sound and meaning, where these notions
are given a technical sense in terms of the interface systems that enter into
the use and interpretation of expressions generated by an I-language. If
SMT held fully, which no one expects, UG would be restricted to properties
imposed by interface conditions.

(Chomsky (2008: 135))

In short, this thesis requires a theory of language to be well-supported by othercognitive systems. This approach seems to be natural and real in terms of naturalscientific theories. Therefore, we assume that the SMT requiring language to be an
optimal solution to legibility conditions is true to explore the nature of human language.
Furthermore, we must take into account not only these interface conditions, but also
biological and evolutional aspects of FL. See the citation from Chomsky (2015b: 34).

(4) One goal of linguistic theory (UG) is to determine the fixed properties of BP
and the options of variation. Naturally, one seeks the simplest account of
UG. One reason is just normal science: it has long been understood that
simplicity of theory is essentially the same as depth of explanation. But for
language there is an extra reason: UG is the theory of the biologicalendowment of the language faculty, and each complication of UG therefore
poses a barrier to some eventual account of the origin of language, to theextent that this can be attained. (BP = Basic Principles)

These arguments require us, as a guiding policy, to pursue “genuine solutions” which
satisfies the conditions. Under the SMT reaching for a true and real explanation, if
10mechanical or descriptive devices are not empirically or independently supported, they
will deviate as imperfections from this guide line.3
Now, keeping this in mind, let us consider what is needed to create linguistic
expressions which can be interpreted appropriately at the interfaces.

The most

primitive and essential operation here is called a “Merge,” which takes two syntactic
objects, X and Y, and forms the new syntactic object K, where K = {X, Y}. The
Merge is induced recursively. K is a label of {X, Y} and K can be either X or Y.
Suppose, for example, that X is a lexical item (Head) and Y can be a composed phrase
containing some other elements in it (WP) as schematized in (5a). (5a) can also takeanother phrase ZP in the upper position ((Spec)ifier), as illustrated in (5b). The
phonological word order is irrelevant at this point. Since the word order is determined
depending on language varieties, it is eventually decided by properties of PF specificto each language.

(5)

a.

X

X

b.

WP

XP

ZP

X´

X

WP

XP contains ZP in the Spec position and X´ (bar) in the sister position of the Spec,
which also contains X in the Head and YP in the Complement. This is known asX´(bar) -Theory. Note, however, that the notations as XP and X´ in the figure above
are used only for expository purposes and they don’t have any “psychological reality,”or “virtual necessities” because they are not directly accessed by the interfaces.4 The
SMT forbids in the course of derivation the introduction of any new elements otherthan those in the lexicon, but it only admits present elements necessary for theinterfaces so as to interpret an expression correctly. This condition is called the“Inclusiveness Condition.” Thus, notations such as XP or any bar levels like X´ must
be excluded and used just for explanatory purposes. Therefore, the Head in the11structure will basically be a label of the structure as shown in (6).5 See the examples
of a verb phrase (VP) and a determiner phrase (DP) included in the sentence of John
won the races.

(6)won (VP)John

won (V´)won (V)the (DP)the (D)

races (NP)

Notice that due to the SMT, each node should be binary, which is thought to make thecomputation more effective. In (6), the DP the races is constructed by merging thedeterminer the and the noun phrase (NP) races, and the head the becomes the label,
which would otherwise be denoted as the DP. Then, the verb (V) won is merged with
the DP the races as its Complement, creating the syntactic object won = {won {theraces}}. Next, the DP John is merged with the structure, and is placed in its Spec.
This new syntactic object is represented as VP as its label and won in a strict sense(Bare Phrase Structure). Optimally, structures to be used should be written in termsof Bare Phrase Structure, but for explanatory purposes, I will use categorial labels in
the following discussion.6
Suppose that Merge of syntactic objects is applied recursively, and consider how
the sentence in (7) is derived.

(7) John won the races.

Suppose that (7) has lexical items selected out of the lexicon, as in (8).

12

(8) Lexical items for (7): {Complementizer (C), Tense (T), John, v*, won, the,races}

These items are selected out of the lexicon for (7) and each item has following
properties; Complementizer (C) expresses force/mood, Tense (T) has tense and event
structure, and the “light (little)” verb v* functions as a head of transitive constructions,providing a thematic role of Agent to the subject. The noun John has both anuninterpretable Case feature [-Case] and interpretable semantic features [+φ].
Likewise, the object DP the race consists of the determiner the and the plural noun
races. This constituent also bears [-Case] and [+φ]. It is also assumed that the CHead has uninterpretable φ features [-φ] to be inherited by the following T-Head.
Note that under standard assumptions, C can also have the Question feature [+Q] with[-Q] on a wh-phrases in cases of interrogatives, on which I will not rely in my analysis.
Instead, I will follow Baker (1970), where an independent Question morpheme (Qmorpheme) can bind a wh-phrase in situ, which assigns an appropriate value andmeaning. I will discuss this in further detail in the following chapters. Here, we only
see briefly a standard instance of derivation. The v*- and T-Head have their innate
properties which can value under certain conditions the [-Case] that all noun phrases
should have. The distinction of [± interpretable] here means the un/interpretability at
the interface. That is, if [+ interpretable], it is legitimate at the CI (LF) interface.
Otherwise, it is not acceptable under the legitimate condition; therefore,
uninterpretable features must become interpretable or valued before they reach theinterfaces. The relationship between the un/interpretable features is a “give-and-take”
relationship in a sense. The [-φ] features on a T- or v*-Head seek as a “probe” for its
matching “goal” DP bearing the relevant [+φ] features in a certain search space within
the c-commanding relation.7 If they match and agree (AGREE), the matching DP has
its own [-Case] feature valued in return by the T- or v*-Head. In fact, “[t]hese
dependencies find their expression in morphological inflection in highly variable,language-specific ways” (Chomsky et. al. (2018: 9)).

13

Let us turn to the sentence (7). Suppose that the derivation has reached v*P as in(9a) below by merging. Note that the operation Merge takes two syntactic objects,
whether lexical items or phrases already constructed, forming a set. Merging an itemfrom the lexicon to another syntactic object is called “External Merge,” by which
generalized argument/thematic relations are established. In (9a), the v* as a probeseeks the matching goal the races with both uninterpretable features ([-Case] on thenoun and [-φ] on the v*) valued under AGREE. Then, T is merged to the v*P. Aftera C-Head has been merged, the T inherits the φ-features from it (9b), seeking the
subject John in the Spec-v*P.

Likewise, under AGREE, the uninterpretable features

will be valued, but the Extended Projection Principle (EPP) feature on T that requiresa phonological element in its Specifier position and moves the subject overtly to theSpecifier position as in (9c). This is another kind of merge called an “Internal Merge,”
which moves an element in the structure already constructed, merging it to the top of
the attracting category, providing a discourse-oriented meaning.

(9) a. [v*P John (-Case, +φ) v* (-φ) [won [the races(-Case, +φ)]]]b. [CP C [T(-φ, EPP) [v*P John (-Case, +φ) v* (-φ) [won [the races(-Case, +φ)]]]]]
c. [CP C [John(-Case, +φ) [T(-φ, EPP) [v*P John v* (-φ) [won [the races(-Case, +φ)]]]]]]

Crucially, the movement and AGREE are limited to a certain search space as justmentioned. The search space is defined as a “phase,” which is typically assumed to
be a CP and v*P, not other projections of functional categories, because it has been
assumed that CP has a force indicator and a v*P includes a full argument structure,and they both create a propositional unit. In addition, these categories function as asemantic and phonological integrity at the interfaces, and they can undergo movement
when necessary. These phases play a very important role in derivations. Due toeffective computations based on SMT, a derivation of an expression proceeds phaseby phase. Each phase undergoes a mapping operation to the interfaces, called a“TRANSFER,” which occurs when a phase is completed. Each phase is output to thetwo interfaces for interpretation. Earlier phases are “forgotten,” so that the burden of14

computation is reduced (Chomsky (2001: 12)).

This comes from the Phase-

Impenetrability Condition (PIC), a version of which is given below. (10) is the coreidea of this condition.

(10) The domain of H is not accessible to operations at ZP; only H and its edge
are accessible to such operations.

(Chomsky (2001: 14))

Suppose that in (11), the HP is a phase with the Head H and the edge α as a specifier.
Suppose also that Z is also a phase-Head while X is a non-phase Head. The conditionin (10) will be schematized as in (11).

(11) [ZP Z ... [XP X … [HP α [H YP]]]]

Under the principle (10), only α and H are accessible from the next phase Head Z.
Each phase head can be optionally assigned an edge-feature [EDGE] to attract anelement overtly to the edge position, the specifier position. If it is assigned to a head,a relevant element must move to the edge position as soon as possible, whereas noelement will be moved without the edge-feature on a phase Head, to which I will turnin the following chapter. Since YP has been sent to the interfaces when the ZP phaseis constructed, no elements in YP can be accessed outside of the HP except contexts
such as a long-distance relationship between an operator and its (unbounded) variable.
This means that all elements in the YP must have become legitimate before thederivation gets to the ZP, because the YP undergoes a TRANSFER. That is, all theuninterpretable features in YP must be valued or moved up to accessible positions
before the lower phase in the derivation reaches the next higher phase. With respect
to this, Chomsky (2001) provides the following guiding principle, where Ph1 and Ph2
stand for the HP and ZP in (11) respectively.

(12) Ph1 is interpreted/evaluated at the next relevant Ph2.
(Chomsky 2001: 13))
15

The principle in (12) suggests that if an expression has unvalued or uninterpretableelements in it, the derivation will be ruled out at the interfaces.8
Suppose that this principle is correct. To see how a derivation including successive
cyclic movement works under this system, let us take (13a), for example, where thewh-phrase appears to have been moved out of the embedded clause to the matrix clause.
In English, a wh-phrase must be moved to the leftmost position, the specifier positionof the matrix C-Head, in a regular interrogative sentence. Although this is motivatedby some independent requirements which we will see in details in the next chapter,under the PIC for effective computation just presented, the wh-phrase is not assumed
to move in a single swoop like (13b).

(13) a.

What do you think John bought yesterday?

b. *[Whati do you think John bought ti yesterday]
X

Although I modify the system of wh-movement by extending Baker’s Q-morpheme
analysis in the next chapter, let us suppose for a moment that an English wh-phrase
moves to the Spec-CP to satisfy the [EDGE] feature on the matrix C-Head. Since the
PIC requires that a category to be moved by the [EDGE] feature on a higher phaseshould not be inside the complement of the lower phase, it has to have moved to thespecifier position of the lower phase by the time the higher phase head is merged.
Under this assumption, the derivation of (13a) is illustrated as follows.

Someirrelevant details are ignored here.

(14) a.

{v*P John {v*´ v*[EDGE] {VP buy what}}}b.

{v*P what {v*P John {v*´ v* [EDGE] {VP buy what}}}}c.

{CP C[EGDE] {TP T [EPP] {v*P what {v*P John {v*´ v* [EDGE] {VP buy what}}}}}}}d.

{CP what {C[EDGE]{TP John {T[EPP] {v*P what {v*P John {v*´ v*[EDGE] {VP buywhat}}}}}}}}

16

e.

{v*P what {v*P you v[EDGE] {VP think {CP what {C[EDGE]{TP John {T[EPP] {v*P what
{v*P John {v*´ v*[EDGE] {VP buy what}}}}}}}}}}}f.

{CP What {C[EDGE]-do {TP you T[EPP] {v*P what {v*P you v*[EDGE] {VP think{CP what {C[EDGE]{TP John {T[EPP] {v*P what {v*P John {v*´ v*[EDGE] {VP buywhat}}}}}}}}}}}}}}

In (14b), the light verb v* and the subject John have been merged to the VP by
External Merge. Since the v* can have the [EDGE] feature optionally assigned on it,
the wh-phrase is moved to the Spec-v*P.9 Otherwise, the PIC would not allow thenext higher phase head, the embedded C-Head, to attract the wh-phrase to its specifier
position. If the [EDGE] feature on the matrix C-Head was left undeleted, this would
violate the Legibility Condition. Note that the Internal Merge like this can yielddiscourse-related properties or “surface semantic effects” such as old information,
specificity, and scope-related effects. These two types of Merge, thus, are related tothe duality of semantics, an essential part of human language.
Note also that what leaves behind its “copy” in the base position instead of “traces”
assumed in the traditional analysis. The original copy left by a moved element willbe ignored for phonological realization at the PF if it is caused by overt movement(“Copy Theory of Movement”). This theory comes from the Inclusiveness Condition
that bars any new elements in the course of derivation. This also appears to follow
naturally from the “No Tempering Condition,” which disallows any modification ofmerged elements. This condition is independently supported by the computational
efficiency based on the SMT.
After the T-Head realized as did and the C have been merged to the v*P as in (14c),
the T-Head inherits the [-φ] features from the C. Then, the T-Head and John enter
into an AGREE relationship, which values each uninterpretable features, while the[EPP] feature on the T-Head attracts John into the Spec-TP.10 Similarly, in (14d), the
C-Head searches for the wh-phrase already internally merged to the edge of the phasethe vP and the [EDGE] feature attracts what to the embedded Spec-CP. After thisoperation, the similar derivation holds for the matrix v* and C as in (14e) and (14f),
17

respectively, causing the convergent derivation with all the uninterpretable featuresdeleted.
To sum up, the framework I assume in this paper has the following properties.

(15) i.

Cognitive Systems consist of:・Lexicon, Syntactic Component, the Sensorymotor (SM/PF) interface,
and the Conceptual-intention (CI/LF) interface.

ii.

Legibility Condition
・No superfluous symbols in representation are admitted.

iii. The Strong Minimalist Thesis
・The human faculty of language provides optimal solutions tolegibility conditions.
iv. Bare Phrase Structure
・Categories are elementary constructions from properties of lexical
items.
v.

(Chomsky (1995: 249))

Two types of Merge (Duality of Semantics)
・Language seeks to satisfy the duality in the optimal way.
(Chomsky (2008: 141))
・External Merge (EM): Merge (X, Y) = {X, Y}, where X nor Y is partof the other, yields a generalized argument/thematic structure.
・Internal Merge: Merge (X, Y) = {X, Y}, where Y is part of X withtwo copies of Y, provides a discourse-related and scopal properties,
namely, surface semantic effect of Y.

vi. Copy Theory of Movement
・A moved element leaves its copy, instead of a trace, in the case ofovert movement, deleted at rules of PF.
vii.

No Tampering Condition
・Merge of X and Y leaves the two syntactic objects unchanged.
・Merge cannot break up X or Y, or add new features to them.
(Chomsky (2008: 138))18

viii.

Probe/Goal Valuation
・An uninterpretable feature searches for its relevant interpretablefeature in the search domain. If they agree, the uninterpretablefeatures become legitimate objects at the interfaces.

ix. Phase Impenetrability Condition[ZP Z ... [HP α [H YP]]]
・The domain (YP) of H is not accessible to operation outside HP; only
H and its edge α are accessible to such operation.
(Chomsky (2001: 13))
(HP and ZP are phases (v*P or CP))・A phase is interpreted/evaluated at the next higher phase.

In the rest of this paper, keeping to the SMT, I assume that these assumptions arecorrect and real in exploring the elliptical phenomena of Sluicing, Multiple Sluicing,
Pseudogapping. To find our way to a more appropriate explanation of these three
elliptical phenomena, I will explore briefly some fundamental and general views of
ellipsis constructions and demonstrate that the PF Deletion approach, which assumes
PF deletion of structures already constructed in the syntactic component, is moreplausible to explain the phenomena.

2.3 LF Copying vs PF Deletion
In order to explore in this framework a more reasonable alternative analysis of thethree elliptical phenomena: Sluicing, Multiple Sluicing, and Pseudogapping, I would
like to introduce some fundamental approaches/analyses previously proposed thathave had large impacts on studies of deletion/ellipsis. Traditionally, to account for
the elliptical phenomena presented above in the first chapter, there have been several
kinds of accounts proposed in the literature. Among them, in general, there have been
two mainstreams of analyses proposed within the generative grammar.

Those

analyses both basically presume that two components, LF and PF, exist outside thesyntactic component that we have already seen above. A lot of analyses previously
19proposed appeal to either of these components. One analysis is based on semanticinterpretation rules, appealing to operations in the LF component. The basic idea of
this analysis is to make up for elliptical parts with semantics in their antecedent
counterparts (LF Copying). This line of analysis was proposed by Williams (1977).
Since then, this idea has been studied and extended by other linguists: to name a few,
Fiengo and May (1994), Chung, Ladusaw, and McCloskey (1995), Lobeck (1995), andWilder (1994). In their analysis, it is claimed that silent parts are empty to begin with,and the meaning in the antecedent parts are copied into the empty parts. Lobeck(1995) extends this idea and claims that ellipsis is only limited to a maximal projection,
which is licensed when the head, taking the deleted maximal projection as its
complement, has an agreement relation with the element in the specifier position.
Williams (1977), adapting Wasow’s (1972) “Empty Structures Hypothesis,” proposedthat a missing constituent has all the structures that its corresponding antecedent
structures have with their lexical nodes occupied by empty elements (deltas), and thatthe corresponding terminals in the antecedent clause are copied into the deltas of themissing structures at a certain stage of derivation after applying some rules of semanticinterpretation.
The other analysis is based on PF deletion, which was first proposed by Ross (1969),
and extended by Chomsky (1972). Since then, this analysis has been considered to
be promising, and is still pursued by a lot of linguists. The basic idea of this analysis
suggests that elliptical structures can be obtained by deleting, at PF, a structure once
constructed in the syntactic component. Therefore, this approach is different from the
LF Copying approach in that elided sites have overt structures constructed before the
PF component, where they are deleted by phonological operations.
It is beneficial to look back quickly at a few approaches, which would give us abasic idea of analyzing the elliptical constructions.

Thus, in this section, we will

briefly review the fundamental ideas of these two previous analyses and consider
problems that may arise.

Finally, we will see that the analyses utilizing PF Deletion

seem more plausible within the current framework in discussion.

20

2.3.1 LF Copying Approach: Williams (1977) -VP DeletionLet us first review the LF Copying approach. Here, we will consider, as one
prominent analysis, the claim by Williams (1977). Williams suggests that elided
structures should be interpreted by copying the lexical elements in the antecedentclause into the empty positions in the elided structures.

To explain ellipticalphenomenon such as VP Deletion, he first presupposes as a framework that there are
two kinds of sub-grammar rules in the grammar: Discourse Grammar Rules andSentence Grammar Rules. Compare (16) as VP Deletion and (17) as Gapping.

(16) A:B:(17) A:B:

Did John leave?
Yes, he did.

(Williams (1977: 102))

Did Sam go to the store?
*No, Bill to the supermarket.

(Williams (1977: 102))

The examples above show whether deletion is permitted “across utterance boundaries”(Williams (1977: 101)). In (16), the deleted part following the auxiliary did in the(16B) can be semantically interpreted as the VP leave in the antecedent sentence (16A).
In Gapping in (17), on the other hand, it is impossible to fill the gapped verb in thesecond clause (17B) with go/went in the preceding sentence (17A). These facts
indicate that VP Deletion allows an anaphoric relation across the sentences in a context,
while Gapping does not allow this cross-utterance relationship, obeying the “sentencebound condition” discussed in Ross (1967). Thus, it is claimed that there are two subgrammar rules in the grammar: Discourse Grammar Rules and Sentence Grammar
Rules, one of which each construction seems to depend on.11
Williams suggests that in order to retrieve the interpretation for the elided part,
antecedent lexical elements are copied into the nodes in the elided structures. Under
this copying analysis, in the VP Deletion in (16) which is possible across utterances,
the antecedent VP in the preceding sentence is available to copy onto the elided VP.
With respect to Gapping in (17) obeying Sentence Grammar, on the other hand,copying the verb (head) into the gapped position is blocked because there is no21

corresponding element included in the same sentence to copy onto its empty slot.
This means that the operation of copying the antecedent VP onto the relevant part in
the elided clause, which Williams calls the “VP Rule,” is an instance of Discourse
Grammar Rules.
Note that since the generative grammar at this era of the 70s was composed of Deep
Structures, Transformation, and Surface Structure, there are some rules or operationsof semantic interpretation applied to Surface Structure to provide the logical form of agiven sentence. In this framework, the logical form created by Sentence Grammar
serves as an input to Discourse Grammar, and its output will eventually produce a
possible meaning.
With this in mind, let us consider the example (18) and look more closely into
Williams’ analysis of VP Deletion based on the LF Copying approach.

(18) John told Bill about himself and George did too.

(Williams (1977: 118))

The sentence (18) is ambiguous with respect to the reference of the reflexive pronoun.
Before analyzing the ambiguity, let us see some facts about a reflexive pronoun. As
is well-known, (19a) is ambiguous between (19b) and (19c) as shown below.

(19) a.

John told Bill about himself.

b.

Johni told Billj about himselfi.

c.

Johni told Billj about himselfj.

(Williams (1977: 118))

Suppose that co-indexization which makes interpretations of reflexives possible isestablished as one of the Sentence Grammar Rules.

By the co-indexization, (18)

would be able to have four logically different readings as given in (20).
examples in (20) are from Shima (2015: 139)).

(20) a.

John told Bill about John and George told Bill about George too.

b.

John told Bill about Bill and George told Bill about George too.
22

(The

c.

John told Bill about John and George told Bill about Bill too.

d.

John told Bill about Bill and George told Bill about Bill too.
(cf. Shima (2015: 139))

As a matter of fact, however, the possible readings of (18) are only (20a) and (20d),and (20b) and (20c) are ruled out. In order to explain these facts, Williams, following
Wasow’s (1972) “Empty Structure Hypothesis,” assumes that an elided sentence has
empty structures inside with every lexical node occupied by deltas Δ. Each Δ in (21)shows a lexical node.

(21) John told [VP Bill about himself] and George did [VP ΔΔΔΔ] too.

Two Sentence Grammar Rules using lambda conversion are applied to interpret theempty VP. One is “Derived VP Rule (DVPR)” proposed by Partee (1973), whichconverts VP in the surface structure into semantic structures denoted by lambda
notation, and the other is Reflexivization, as an obligatory conversion rule, that turns
reflexive pronouns into variables bound by the lambda operator. The important thing
to keep in mind is that the rules of lambda conversions are instances of Sentence
Grammar Rules, which Discourse Grammar Rules follow.

Applying theseconversion rules to (18), the interpretation of the first conjunct in (18), the LF of (19a),
could be obtained in two ways as shown below. First, the DVPR converts theantecedent VP in (21) into (22).

(22) John λx (VP x told Bill about himself)

Then, there are two ways for the derivation to proceed; (22) will be converted into
(23a) or (23b) depending on how a rule of Reflexivization is applied. If the reflexive
pronoun converted into a variable chooses the lambda as its binder, the LF structure
will be (23a). If the reflexive pronoun, on the other hand, links itself to the object
noun Bill, its LF structure will be (23b).
23

(23) a.
b.

John λx (VP x told Bill about x)
John λx (VP x told Billj about himselfj)

Recall that VP Rule, LF copying of the VP, is one of the Discourse Grammar Rules.
Since DVPR and Reflexivization are both assumed to be the Sentence Grammar Rules,
these rules must come before the VP rule, which copies the antecedent VP into theempty sites in the second conjunct. After the VP Rule has copied the VP of (23a) and(23b) into the empty nodes in (21), (21) will be represented as either (24a) or (24b),
respectively.

(24) a.

John λx (VP x told Bill about x) and George did λx (VP x told Bill aboutx).

b.

John λx (VP x told Billj about himselfj) and George did λx (VP x told Billj
about himselfj)

These structures eventually result in yielding (20a) and (20d).

To obtain theinterpretation in (20b) and (20c), the VP Rule should be applied before DVPR and
Reflexivization are induced, but it is impossible because the former is a Discourse
Grammar Rule applied to the output of Sentence Grammar Rules.
I have just introduced the LF Copying approach, under which the copying operation
at LF fills their elided parts with the LF structures in the relevant preceding sites. Thisapproach seems to be interesting and attractive as it can explain at least some of thefacts associated with VP Deletion. Unfortunately, however, there are some problems
with this LF Copying approach. The first problem is: Why are there two kinds ofgrammar rules, such as Sentence Grammar Rules and Discourse Grammar Rules? It
is not so clear what determines the order of application of Reflexivization and the
DVPR. Furthermore, exactly what syntactic status should we give to the Δs assumed
in his analysis? It would be a deeper question under the framework we are pursuing
how we should take such prima facie language-specific material.
24

Ideally, we would

like to avoid using these artificial devices.

We will turn to the copying approach in

the next chapter to examine a derivation of Sluicing.
Next, I would like to examine anther analysis based on a deletion operation at PF.

2.3.2 PF Deletion Approach
In this section, I would like to introduce another intriguing approach to deletion
phenomena, based on a phonological operation at PF known as the “PF Deletion”
approach. This approach suggests, in general, that elided structures are derived bydeleting structures once constructed in the syntactic component.

Unlike the LF

Copying approach, it is claimed that elided sites have syntactic structures taken as preelliptical forms and undergo the PF operation of Deletion to make them
“unpronounced.” I will base my analysis of elliptical phenomena on this approach.
The fundamental idea of this analysis was first proposed by Ross (1969), andChomsky (1972) extended his analysis. Building on their arguments, Hankmer andSag (1976) made further progress.

Since then, this approach has been pursued

intensively and extensively with some modifications by generative linguists, such as
Fox (2000), Merchant (2001), and Fox and Lasnik (2003).

Specifically, Merchant(2001) proposes an extensive analysis by observing Sluicing, which I will examine
more closely in Chapter 4.

Although it is necessary to explore as many phenomena

as possible and examine the adequacy of this PF Deletion approach, it is worthwhile
and important for a moment to review quickly some fundamental arguments for PF
Deletion through VP Deletion observed by Hankmer and Sag (1976), and Sluicing by
Ross (1969) and Merchant (2001).

2.3.2.1 PF Deletion Approach 1: Hankmer and Sag (1976) - VP Deletion –In the last section, taking an instance of VP Deletion, we have seen the LF Copying
approach, in which elided sites are phonologically null and their interpretation can be
retrieved by copying the meaning of the antecedent VP.
Deletion approach to the same phenomenon.

25

This section introduces PF

Take first Hankmer and Sag (1976).

They provide some fundamental arguments supporting this phonological deletion
approach regarding VP Deletion.
Hankamer and Sag (1976) pointed out that, crucially, an elliptical construction needs
an overt linguistic expression in its antecedent part.

Unpronounced VP sites would

not be admitted even when its meaning could be inferred in a given situation.

For

example, imagine a situation where s/he attempts to stuff a 9-inch ball through a 6inch hoop.

In this situation, (25) is not acceptable though the sentence itself isgrammatical.

(25) #It’s not clear that you’ll be able to.

(Hankamer and Sag (1976: 392))

However, if the linguistic expression corresponding to the imaginary situation aboveis overtly uttered, the similar VP deletion will be possible.

(26) Hankamer: I’m going to stuff this ball through this hoop.
Sag:

It’s not clear that you’ll be able to.
(Hankamer and Sag (1976: 392))

This is also true of Sluicing, and Gapping.

First, see an instance of Sluicing below.

Compare (27) and (28).

(27) Situation:[Hankamer produces a gun, points it offstage and fires,
whereupon a scream is heard.]

Sag:#Jesus, I wonder who.

(28) Hankamer: Someone’s just been shot.
Sag:

Yeah, I wonder who.

(Hankamer and Sag (1976: 408))

In (27) above, Sag’s utterance is not appropriately understood even though thesentence seems to be grammatical.

(28), on the other hand, shows that if the similar

situation is linguistically expressed in the preceding utterance, a certain material26

proposition following the wh-phrase can be elliptical.

That is, elided parts must be“syntactically controlled.”
The same holds true for an instance of Gapping, where the matrix verb seems tohave been deleted.

(29) Situation:

See (29) and (30) below.

[Hankamer produces an orange, proceeds to peel it, and just as
Sag produces an apple, says: ]#And Ivan, an apple.

(Hankamer and Sag (1976: 410))(30) Hankamer: Ivan is now going to peel an apple.
Sag:

And, Jorge, an orange.

(Hankamer and Sag (1976: 410))

These examples show that in order for deleted sites to be interpreted correctly, overt
expressions are needed in the preceding utterance.
Furthermore, this analysis provides a natural account for examples involving
passivization.

(31) a.
b.

Compare (31a) and (31b).

Nobody else would take the oats down the bin, so Bill did.
The oats had to be taken down to the bin, so *Bill did.
(cf. Hankamer and Sag (1976: 413))

In (31a), where the antecedent is in a form of active voice, the following sentence is
acceptable with the same voice.

In (31b), on the other hand, the same deletion in thesecond clause is not possible.

This comes from the difference in the voice between

the first and the second clause. These examples support the argument that deletionis only possible when an overt linguistic expression occurs in an antecedent sentence.
That is, the deletion phenomena above can be naturally explained if we assume that
elliptical parts are literally deleted by a phonological deletion operation under identity.
In the next section, let us see briefly other analyses of this approach by focusing on
Sluicing, though I will discuss this in greater detail in the next chapter.

27

2.3.2.2 PF Deletion Approach 2: Ross (1969) and Merchant (2001) -SluicingNext, let us review Ross’ (1969) PF Deletion approach, which was published before
Hankamer and Sag’s and has had a great impact on the subsequent study of deletion
phenomena since then. Ross suggests that elided structures are derived by applying
a deletion operation at PF to structures already constructed in the syntactic component,
and claims that the sentence (32a), called “Sluicing,” results from deleting the TP
already projected with wh-movement as shown in (32c).

(32) a.

She kissed a man who bit one of my friends, but Tom doesn’t realize
which one of my friends.

b. *She kissed a man who bit one of my friends, but Tom doesn’t realize[which one of my friends]i [TP she kissed [a man who bit ti]].
c.

She kissed a man who bit one of my friends, but Tom doesn’t realize[which one of my friends]i [TP she kissed [a man who bit ti]].

As shown in (32b), if the wh-phrase crossed a complex noun phrase in wh-movement,
the movement would violate one of the island conditions, which I will discuss in thenext chapter.

Thus, this movement should be ruled out and (32a) would be

ungrammatical. However, (32c) shows that if the complex noun phrase is elided bydeleting the TP phonologically, this island violation appears to be “repaired” and (32a)will be grammatical.
Ross claims that the PF deletion plays an important role to explain ellipticalphenomena and in fact, the PF Deletion approach is supported by some empirical facts.
Since Ross presents ample evidence in support of this approach, I will leave thepresentation of these examples for a further discussion on Sluicing in the next chapter.
Here, I would like to see some other evidence Merchant (2001) provides to support
this approach. The examples below are related with preposition stranding. Compare
the English examples with preposition stranding with the Greek examples disallowingit.

28

(33) a.

Who was he talking with?

b.

Peter was talking with someone, but I don’t know who.

c.

Peter was talking with someone, but I don’t know with who. 12d.

Peter was talking with someone, but I don’t know with whom.
(cf. Merchant (2001: 92))

In English, a wh-phrase can be moved to the front position with the preposition left
behind as in (33a). Thus, in the case of Sluicing, when the relevant TP is deleted, thepreposition can be stranded and deleted along as (33b). As in (33c) and (33d), thepreposition can be pied-piped with the wh-phrase.

(33c) and (33d) show thepossibility that the preposition and the wh-phrase are both once generated as in (34),and the relevant TP is deleted after the pied-piped wh-movement.

(34) a.

[was he talking [with who(m)]]b.

[with who(m) [was he talking]]?

The Greek example also shows us that the PF deletion approach is more plausible.
In Greek, which disallows preposition stranding unlike English, Sluicing with apreposition stranded is also impossible. See (35).

(35) a.

I Anna milise me kapjon,alla dhe ksero *(me) pjon.
the Anna spoke with someone but not I.know with who‘Anna spoke with someone but I don’t know with whom.”b. *Pjon misileme?

who she.spoke with
‘Whom did she speak with?’(Merchant (2001: 94))

In (35a), the preposition me must occur with the wh-phrase pjon. This means that,just like the English example, the prepositional phrase me pjon has been moved by wh-29

movement, and afterward, the inner TP undergoes deletion in PF. The analysis basedon LF Copying cannot easily or naturally explain the facts in (35).
Merchant gives additional evidence supporting the PF Deletion approach in termsof the selectional properties of complements.

He argues that the category of aremnant in Sluicing is a CP, not a DP, and the lower structure TP is deleted. Let us
take a look at examples which support this point. Main verbs such as know andremember can take not only a DP but also a CP as their complement.

(36) a.
b.

Jack know Guard Mulligan.
Jill remembers the important announcement from yesterday.
(Merchant (2001: 41))(37) a.
b.

Jack knows which guard was present.
Jill remembers what I told you yesterday.

(Merchant (2001: 41))

With this in mind, consider how the multiple wh-question (38a) is be interpreted. If
the unpronounced part following which was considered to be a TP, the second sentencein (38a) would be paraphrased as (38b), and if the category of which itself was taken
as the DP, it would be interpreted as (38c).

(38) a.

He claimed one of the guards had been present. Who knows which?

b.

Who knows which guard he claimed had been present?

c.

Who knows which guard?

(Merchant (2001: 41))

Examining a possible answer to (38a) will give us an answer to which can be true. If
there is a TP structure following which, the wh-phrase is taken as an indirect question,and then the required answer is only about the matrix subject as (39a). If which was
a DP, on the other hand, a pair-list answer in accordance with the matrix subject should
be possible as (39b).

(39) a.

Jack does. / Jack knows which.
30

b. #Jack knows Guard Mulligan, Bill knows Guard Keeley, etc.
(Merchant (2001: 42))As the facts indicate, the only possible answer is (39a). This supports the idea thatthe category of the complement in Sluicing is not a DP, but a CP with its TP
complement deleted by phonological operations.
Finally, there is another important argument in support of the PF Deletion approach.
The argument, which is originally suggested by Ross (1969), is based on Caseagreement of a wh-phrase in Sluicing.

In an English dialect that distinguishes

between who and whom, only who is allowed in the context in (40), but not whom.

(40) a.

Somebody from Kankakee is going to be invited to the party by Ralph,
but they don’t know who/*whom is going to be invited to the party by
Ralph.

b.

Somebody from Kankakee is going to be invited to the party by Ralph,
but they don’t know who/*whom.

(Ross (1969:254))

This fact indicates that the wh-phrase in this case is Case-marked by the element in theembedded clause, not by the matrix verb, know. Similarly, this is also observed in
Greek. The examples are from Merchant (2001).

(41) a.

Kapjosirthe, alla dhe ksero

someone came, but not I.know(pjos / *pjon).
who-Nom / *who-Acc‘Someone came, but I don’t know who.’b.

Dhe ksero(*i apantisi/ tin apantisi).

not I.know-1SG the answer-Nom / the answer-Acc‘I don’t know the answer.’(Merchant (2001: 43))

As we can see in (41b) above, the verb know assigns Accusative Case to its object. As
in (41a), however, who in the object position is only possible with Nominative Case.
31

If Case is assigned/checked in the syntactic component under probe-goal agreement
system, some probe that values the Case of wh-phrase must have appeared before thedeletion operation is applied.

These arguments presented above show that thesalvaged elements have been extracted out of the elided clause in Sluicing. The LF
Copying approach, however, cannot possibly explain this adequately.
The PF Deletion analysis seems to be more reasonable in this sense. Furthermore,
the analysis is also theoretically superior to the LF Copying one. If the meaning in
the antecedent had to be copied onto the empty sites in the elided sentence, it would
impose more loads on derivation, which should be avoided in favor of the SMT andeffective computation. In addition, if empty structures including elements such asdeltas have been externally merged with remnant structures, those parts would have to
be untouchable at a later stage of its derivation.

Therefore, it is theoreticallyunwelcome to replace the empty sites with the meaning of the antecedent category.
As discussed above, the LF Copying approach is not empirically nor theoreticallyplausible enough, rendering it invaluable. On the other hand, as far as we can see
from the evidence above, the PF Deletion approach is more appealing and thus worth
pursuing. Therefore, I will keep to the PF Deletion Approach as more reasonable inorder to explain elliptical phenomena.

2.4 What Licenses Deletion? -ParallelismEven though we have seen that the LF Copying approach is not endurable enough,their fundamental goal seems to be correct in a sense. It is to guarantee that thesemantic interpretation in the antecedent site must be reflected in the elided structureso that the deleted sites are correctly interpreted, and there must not be an asymmetry
between the antecedent site and the elided site.

That is, semantic identity or

recoverability, namely some kind of parallelism, must be guaranteed to interpret
elliptical sentences appropriately. In other words, we need a licensing condition on
applicability of deletion.
Under the PF deletion approach, it has been discussed how to formalize a licensing
condition.

Examining the examples introduced by Fox (2000), we can see that an LF
32

structural parallelism would be promising.

Let us take (42) and (43) for example,

with phonological reduction, which is supposed to serve just like an ellipsis.

The

italicized parts below are phonologically reduced.

(42) a.

First Bill called Mary an idiot. Then John insulted her.

b. *First John insulted Mary. Then Bill called her an idiot.
(Fox (2000: 84))(43) a.

John talked to every woman he saw. Bill talked to many women, too.

b. *Bill talked to many women. John talked to every woman he saw, too.
(Fox (2000: 84))

In (42a) and (43a), phonological reduction is acceptable, but the reversed order of theseconjuncts in (42b) and (43b) will be unacceptable if the VP in the second conjunctundergoes reduction.
Fox (2000) argues that the unacceptability of (42b) and (43b) can be explained interms of parallelism between the antecedent and the elliptical clause.
of parallelism is presented below.

His core idea

Note that the basic intuition is suggested by Rooth(1992).

(44) Phonological reduction of a constituent of α is licensed only if at LF there
is some constituent β that reflexively dominates α and the discourse
contains an antecedent LF, βA, such that that (a) or (b) holds.
a. βA is an appropriate alternative to β.
b. βA together with the shared presupposition entails an antecedent LF,
βAC.
β reflexively dominates α if β dominates α or β = α.

(Fox (2000: 85))

Under this parallelism, phonological reduction is licensed if the elided sites are thesame as the antecedent in terms of linguistic expression or those inferable fromdiscourse.

Roughly speaking, they must share together the same linguistic33

elements/expressions present in discourse. This can account for (42) and (43). In(42a), the proposition of Bill calling Mary an idiot entails that Bill insulted Mary, andthis can be the appropriate antecedent for the second conjunct. In (42b), however, it
is impossible to infer that Bill called Mary an idiot by stating that Bill insulted Maryin the first sentence. The same line of reasoning can be applied to (43). Therefore,
it is very reasonable to believe that this intuition is strong enough to cover what the LF
Copying approach aims to capture.
Building on this, Fox formalizes the parallelism further in a different way. He
recasts the parallelism in (44) in terms of LF representation and the modified
parallelism is presented as in (45).

(45) Phonological reduction or deletion is licensed only if either of the following
holds.
a. The LF of a sentence that contains the elided/down-stressed material, βE
is structurally isomorphic to a sentence that contains the antecedent, βA.
b. βA (together with shared presuppositions) entails an LF, βAC, and βAC isstructurally isomorphic to βE.

(Fox (2000))

The underlying intuitions suggested in both (44) and (45) are the same.

The

parallelism in both cases requires that the antecedent and the elided sentence must
share the semantic meaning together. In fact, the parallelism in (45), based on the LF
structural isomorphism, can also account for the contrast in (46).

(46) a.

A boy talked to every teacher, and a girl did (talk), to Jane.

b.

A girl talked to Jane, and a boy did, (talk) to every teacher.
(∃ > ∀) *(∀ > ∃)(Fox (2000: 96))

The sentence A boy talked to every teacher is normally scopally ambiguous.
Interestingly, however, the sentence in the cases above is disambiguated with respect34

to scope relation. If Fox’s generalization (47) is correct, this will be straightforwardly
accounted for.

(47) Scopally uninformative sentences are restricted to surface scope.
(Fox (2000: 109))

The generalization (47) blocks the object DP Jane from taking wide scope over the
subject DP a girl because no inverted effect comes out. This is schematized asfollows.

(48) a. βA: every teacher λy [a boy λx [x talked to y]]βE:
b. βA:

a girl λx [Jane λy [x talked to y]] (46a)a girl λx [Jane λy [x talked to y]]βE: every teacher λy [a boy λx [x talked to y]](46b)Considering the isomorphism for the given LF structures in (48), neither of them cansatisfy the parallelism (45), thus making the inversed scope reading for (46)unavailable.13
As seen above, the parallelism based on LF representation can work well to explain
the contrast given above. Therefore, I assume that this line of explanation is basicallycorrect and the parallelism of this line should be adapted as a working definition.
Based on the discussion above, I would like to explore to what extent we can go to
explain deletion phenomena, focusing mainly on Sluicing, Multiple Sluicing, andPseudogapping.

Notes for Chapter 2* Some part of this chapter appeared in Hirai (2014), “Sakujyo Gensyou wo Megutte-Sluicing wo Chuushin-ni (On Phenomenon of Deletion -With Special Reference to
Sluicing-),” Seisei Bunpou no Kiseki to Tenbou (The History and Future of Generative
Grammar). I would like to thank Naoyuki Ono, Makoto Kondo, Takeo Kurafuji, and35

Kazumi Matsuoka for their helpful comments and discussion.

1. It is obvious that linguistic expressions are hierarchical and structure-dependent,
but not sting-dependent. Consider the well-known examples in (ia) and (ib).
(i) a. birds that fly instinctively swim
b. instinctively, birds that fly swim.

(Chomsky (2017a: 201))

The example (ia) is ambiguous in that the adverb instinctively can modify either fly
or swim, while the (ib) is not because the adverb only modifies the matrix verb. Thissuggests that closeness in terms of linear order is ignored, but structural distance ismore important.
2. This condition is also called “Full Interpretation.” Here I assume that they are thesame in nature.
3. The subsequent studies by Chomsky and other bio-linguists suggest that all
linguistic mechanisms require accounts based on biological (path-dependent)
evolutional history, brain science, and other cognitive supports. For details, see
Chomsky (2005) and others.
4. See Chomsky (2000: 96-97).

Chomsky mentions that descriptive devices are

subject to more strict conditions imposed by the SMT.
5. The latest theory advocated by Chomsky (2013, 2015b, 2017a, and 2017b) assumes
that Merge comes free, and each label is determined by the labeling algorism underthe minimal search supported independently by the SMT, because labels are necessaryfor each projection to be interpreted at the interface. Although it is very intriguing todiscuss the elliptical phenomena in this point, I will put this aside here and follow theassumption in discussion.
6. As illustrated in (6), the sentential subject is base-generated within the verb phrase(VP internal subject hypothesis). The more precise structure supposes that it is basegenerated in the specifier position of the light verb (verbalizer) v-Head built above the
VP. I turn to the detailed structure later.
7. α c-commands β if α does not dominate β and every γ that dominates α dominates
β.
36

8. Chomsky, Gallego, and Ott (to appear), suggest that transferred phases can beaccessed as long as the properties of a probe in the higher phase are affected by anelement in the transferred phase from some evidence involving a quirky subject
configuration. This possibility has already been implied by Chomsky (2000, 2001),
but a lot of issues still remain to be clarified. Here, I assume that all elements in thelower phase should be legible.
9. What does wh-movement come from? Precisely speaking, under the theory indiscussion, just like the subject-movement we have seen, it is assumed that overt
movement is induced collaboratively by feature-matching and the EPP (edge) featureon the target head. To derive a normal English wh-question, therefore, wh-phrases
are assumed to have a [+Q] feature and [-WH] feature, which are valued by thematching [-Q] on the C-Head with the EPP (edge) feature. If so, under the PIC, inorder for the valuation and movement across phases to be correctly carried out, it
would be necessary to assume that not only v*Ps but also the C-Head of an embedded
non-interrogative clause as (14) should have those features with the EPP assigned. It
is still unclear why this is possible. In fact, as Epstein, Kitahara, and Seely (2017)
point out, it has long been one of the theoretical problems with the literature since
Chomsky’s adjunction proposed by Chomsky (1986b).
It is assumed here that in English normal wh-questions, wh-movement still obeys
the PIC and a wh-phrase moves successive cyclically via phases to output a new
outcome for the requirement of the C-Head. Thus, the movement to an intermediate
position would include a problem of “look-ahead,” which is not welcome under theconsideration of the minimalist framework.

I will return to this in the next chapter

and consider another possibility in terms of Baker’s Abstract Question Morpheme.
10. I follow the traditional assumption that all clauses obligatorily have a subject in aSpec-TP whether the position is phonologically realized by a DP or occupied by pro
or PRO. This principle is taken as the requirement of the EPP feature on a T-Head.
11. For more evidence to support the assumption that VP Deletion can be induced as
Discourse Grammar, see Williams (1977).

37

12. Some speakers judge (33c) as unacceptable if the preposition occurs with the whphrase.
13. Other examples will be presented to support this idea in the next chapter.

38

Chapter 3*
On Sluicing

3. 1 Introduction
In this chapter, I will examine one type of the elliptical constructions, called “Sluicing,”as (1a) and (2a), which was first pointed out by Ross (1969). I will call this construction“Single Sluicing” (henceforth, SS) to distinguish Sluicing with multiple wh-phrases as (3a)where multiple wh-phrases are left undeleted, which is called Multiple Sluicing (MS). In
the former, only one wh-phrase is left as a remnant, and the TP structure following the whphrase seems to be omitted.

(1) a.
b.
(2) a.

Somebody just left --- Guess who.
Somebody just left --- Guess who just left.

(Ross (1969: 252))

Ralph is going to invite somebody from Kankakee to the party, but they
don’t know who.

b.

Ralph is going to invite somebody from Kankakee to the party, but they
don’t know who he’s going to invite to the party.

(3) a.

(Ross (1969: 252))

I know that in each instance one of the girls got something from one of theboys. But they didn't tell me which from which.

b.

I know that in each instance one of the girls got something from one of theboys. But they didn't tell me which got something from which.
(Lasnik (2014: 5))

Just like other elliptical constructions discussed in the first chapter, the (a) sentences in (1)(3) are consistently understood as the (b) sentences. There are a lot of interesting facts
observed in this construction as we see below, which has long been drawing a lot of attention,
39

particularly, with respect to its derivation within the framework of the generative grammar.
However, it is still unclear how this SS is derived.

Therefore, clarifying how thisconstruction is derived within the framework of the generative grammar is theoreticallymeaningful and important. In this chapter, I would like to explore an alternative accountfor this construction and propose that except some cases, a wh-phrase in SS stays in situ,
bound by a relevant operator with the other structures deleted. In particular, extending
Baker’s argument for Abstract Question Morpheme (henceforth, Q-morpheme) for whphrases, I will suggest that the Q-morpheme is located on the C-Head with two properties
in nature; in languages such as English, the morpheme requires at least one wh-phrase to bephonologically adjacent to it, and it can bind a wh-phrase in situ within a remote phase.
When deletion occurs in English SS, the phonological requirement is satisfied even if thewh-phrase stays in situ. That is, if the intervening structures are deleted, SS is admitted
even without wh-movement because the Q-morpheme satisfies the adjacency requirement
for a remnant wh-phrase, and at the same time, it is bound by the morpheme. When
structures involving other intervening elements exist, English SS is ruled out. Furthermore,
I will claim that as an identity condition for deletion, an isomorphism of LF structures
involving an operator-variable relation admits PF deletion of the structures, in which casestructures presupposed in the antecedent must be maximally deleted with focused elements
intact.
This chapter is organized as follows; In the next section, I will present some moreinteresting facts observed in SS and suggest that they force us to reconsider the discussion
on the LF Copying approach versus the PF Deletion approach. In the section 3, I will
return to the debate on the approaches, and I will introduce two main approaches to SS by
Chung, Ladusaw, and McCloskey (1995) (henceforth, CLM) for the LF Copying approach,and Merchant (2001) and Fox and Lasnik (2003) for the PF Deletion approach. In addition,
one of the recent approaches based on PF Deletion, called “MaxElide,” will be reviewed ina later section. Then, we will consider some problems that may arise within the minimalist
framework in discussion, and see that none of the analyses are empirically or theoreticallyplausible enough. Then, extending Baker (1970), I will explore possibilities that a whphrase would not have to undergo wh-movement to a Spec-CP in SS while it has to move40

to a Spec-CP in a normal (embedded) interrogative. As a possible explanation, I will showthat my wh-in situ approach, LF parallelism, and Maximal Effect of Deletion will be able toexplain SS correctly. Finally, the section 4 concludes the chapter.

3. 2 Empirical Facts
3. 2. 1 Is PF Deletion Related to Sluicing (SS)?
In this section, we will see first that SS involves very mysterious phenomena. In order
to see how strange properties SS has and thus how important it is to explain its derivation,
let us begin by reviewing the facts pointed out by Ross (1969). Recall that some empiricalfacts related to preposition stranding and other phenomena enable us to believe that the PF
Deletion approach where fully constructed structures are deleted at the PF interface is a morereasonable one to explain some elliptical phenomena, and this is the case of SS. Below aresome other facts supporting the PF deletion in SS. The examples below are related with
Case of a wh-phrase in SS. The examples are based on the discussion in Ross (1969: 252).1(4) a.

Ralph is going to invite somebody from Kankakee to the party, but they don’tknow who/whom he is going to invite t to the party.

b.

Ralph is going to invite somebody from Kankakee to the party, but they don’tknow who/whom.

Speakers who admit whom as an object wh-phrase in a wh-question use whom both in an
embedded interrogative clause such as (4a) and in SS such as (4b). However, this option
is not observed in the context of (5) below, where the wh-phrase serves as the subject in theembedded clause. Compare (4) and (5). The examples below are based on Ross (1969:
254).

(5) a.

Somebody from Kankakee is going to be invited to the party by Ralph, butthey don’t know who/*whom is going to be invited to the party by Ralph.

b.

Somebody from Kankakee is going to be invited to the party by Ralph, butthey don’t know who/*whom.
41

Notice that in (5), the wh-phrase appears to have originated from the subject position in theembedded interrogative clause, but in this case, unlike (4), the option of using whom is notpossible.
The fact that only who can occur in the position in (5) while whom is not admitted
explicitly indicates that it is more reasonable to assume that the clause structure alreadyconstructed is deleted at a certain (later) stage of the derivation. (4b) does not make it clear
what could value the Case feature of the remnant wh-phrase because the Case feature could
be valued by either a functional element in the matrix clause or the one in the elided clause.
Looking at (4) and (5), however, we would find it reasonable to suppose that the Case featureof wh-phrase is valued by an element in the following TP clause, which will undergo
deletion at PF after Spell-Out. The fact that only who with a nominative Case is possiblein (5) clearly shows that its Case is not valued by an element in the matrix clause, but by a
Case-valuing element in the structure to undergo deletion. If an unvalued Case feature isvalued in a probe-goal relation before mapping to the interfaces, there must be features tolicense a wh-phrase of SS in Syntax. Under the LF Copying approach in which ellipsis
sites are assumed to be structurally empty, the facts above cannot be explained
straightforwardly. The empirical facts just seen, therefore, allow us to suppose that SS also
results from the PF deletion which follows Case-valuing and wh-movement.
Another example supporting PF deletion approach comes from Ross’s observation on
idiomatic phrases. As is well known, idiomatic sequences cannot be broken up. See (6)(8).

(6) a.

Who are you going to do away with?

b. *With whom are you going to do away?
(7) a.

What will we have to make do with?

b. *With what will we have to do?
(8) a.

Which plot did the FBI get wind of first?

b. *Of which plot did the FBI get wind first?

(Ross (1969: 264))

As we can see above, the idiomatic phrases involving the wh-phrase with the pied-piped
42

preposition are not judged as grammatical. Under the PF deletion approach, the same
results would be expected to come out in the SS context. This expectation is indeed bornout.

(9) a.

Bill’s planning on doing away with one of his inlaws, but I don’tknow which.

b. *Bill’s planning on doing away with one of his inlaws, but I don’tknow with which.
(10) a.

(Ross (1969: 265))

We’ll have to make do with some kind of vile 3.2 beer for our punch, but I
don’t know exactly what kind.

b. *We’ll have to make do with some kind of vile 3.2 beer for our punch, but I
don’t know with exactly what kind.
(11) a.

(Ross (1969: 265))

The FBI got wind of one of the many plots to smoke draft cards, but
I can’t remember which.

b. *The FBI got wind of one of the many plots to smoke draft cards, but
I can’t remember of which.

(Ross (1969: 265))

As shown above, the SS examples with the idioms where a preposition is pied-piped arealso ungrammatical.

These facts are attributed to the analysis that the preposition isprevented from being pied-piped in the course of derivation. This is what the PF deletion
approach can expect. Under the LF copying approach, on the other hand, it is not easy to
explain these facts without further complexities.
Thus, we can conclude here that PF Deletion approach is more appealing, and a deletion
operation is applied to fully constructed structures to derive SS. However, there are someinteresting and mysterious facts we have to consider, which could counter the analysis here.
Some examples are presented in the next section.

3. 2. 2 Mysteries: Question
The last section showed that SS appears to be derivable by PF Deletion. This approachseems to account for the SS examples we have already seen without difficulty. However,43there are some outlier cases. Worthy of note is the very strange and baffling instance of SS
whose unsaid sites include so-called “syntactic islands.” Generally speaking, it is assumed
that clauses or phrases such as relative clauses, sentential subjects, complex noun phrases,
and embedded wh-clauses count as islands, and extraction out of them is blocked as
violation of island conditions, which are unified as “subjacency condition.”2(12) a. *Who did she kiss a man who bit t?
b. *Who is that he’ll hire t is possible?

(Relative Clause)(Sentential Subject)c. *Who do you believe the claim that he bit t? (Complex Noun Phrase)d. *What problem was Sandy trying to work out which student would be able tosolve t? (Embedded Wh-Interrogative)

Under the conditions, these examples are all ruled out because the wh-phrase has been
moved across the island.
However, interestingly, in the case of SS, things become different.

Let us see thefollowing instances of SS.

(13) Complex Noun Phrase (Relative Clause)a.

She kissed a man who bit one of my friends, but Tom doesn’t realize which
one of my friends.

b. *She kissed a man who bit one of my friends, but Tom doesn’t realize which
one of my friends she kissed a man who bit t.

(Ross (1969: 276))(14) Complex Noun Phrase (Adjunct Clause)a.

I believe the claim that he bit someone, but they don’t know who.

b. *I believe the claim that he bit someone, but they don’t know who I believe
the claim that he bit t.
(15) Sentential Subjecta.

That he’ll hire someone is possible, but I won’t divulge who.

b. *That he’ll hire someone is possible, but I won’t divulge who that he’ll hire t
is impossible.

(Ross (1969: 277))44

(16) Embedded Wh-Interrogativea.

Sandy was trying to work out which students would be able to solve a certain
problem, but she wouldn’t tell us which one.

b. *? Sandy was trying to work out which students would be able to solve a certain
problem, but she wouldn’t tell us which one she was trying to work out which
students would be able to solve.

(CLM (1995: 272))

Once again, preliminarily, the (a) sentences are interpreted as the (b) sentences even though
the relevant parts are silent. In (13)-(16), since the unsaid sites seem to include an island,
the wh-phrase appears to have moved across the island or some kind of boundary, violating
the island condition: the complex noun phrase constraint (a relative clause in (13) and an
adjunct in (14)), the sentential subject condition in (15) and the (embedded) wh-clause in(16). Thus, as we can expect, if each island is phonologically realized in those contexts,
the sentences will become ungrammatical.

However, if the elements other than the

preposed wh-phrase in the embedded CP are phonologically unrealized like the (a) examples
above, the island violations in question seem to be obviated or cancelled.

That is,apparently, violation may have been “repaired” or “salvaged” by the deletion process.
However, some questions arise immediately. Under the PF Deletion approach, how is
it possible for a wh-phrase to move to the embedded CP position, violating an island
condition at all? We have seen that the ungrammaticality of (5) and (9)-(11) is attributed
to failure of the implement of Case-valuing by an element in the elided clause and the failureof pied-piping in idiomatic phrases, respectively. If structures undergoing deletion must
be built up first, the relevant structures in (13)-(16) should never be able to be constructedin the first place.

Unfortunately, the PF Deletion approach at hand is not satisfactory

enough to explain how wh-movement could violate an island condition to flee from elided
sites. Thus, we are forced to ask whether the grammaticality of the (a) sentences in (13) (16) comes from repair, and whether the PF Deletion approach can be really a reasonable
analysis available to SS. Therefore, it is worthwhile to reconsider some previous accounts
for SS.
In the following sections, turning again to the debate of LF Copying approach versus PF
45

Deletion approach, I would like to explore a more reasonable analysis of how SS can bederived and consider how we can explain the facts observed in SS.

3. 3 The Debate on the LF Copying Approach and PF Deletion Approach Again
3. 3. 1 TP-Copying (Recycling)
3. 3. 1. 1 TP-Recycling in SS
The most significant analysis of SS in favor of LF Copying approach has been provided
by CLM. Following Heim (1982), Kamp (1984), Wasow (1972) and Williams (1977),
CLM assume that indefinite noun phrases and wh-phrases are bound by a certain operator,and suggests that SS involves LF-copying of TP (Inflection Phrase (IP) in their term), called“TP-Recycling,” which dispenses with any kind of syntactic wh-movement or deletion
operations at PF. They further argue that an elided clause involves an structure such as(17a) to begin with, where the C-Head and its complement TP are derived as empty, and in
the same way as Williams’ (1977) VP Deletion we saw in Chapter 2, the semantic meaningof the corresponding TP in the antecedent is copied (“recycled” in their analysis) into thenull site in the elided TP at LF. This is illustrated in (17b). (See CLM (233-244))(17) a.
b.

[TP John [VP saw someone]], but I wonder [CP who [C´ e [TP e ]]][TP John [VP saw someone]], but I wonder [CP who [C´ e [TP John saw
someone]]]Let us look more carefully at the mechanism of recycling. According to Heim (1982),
Kamp (1984), Kuroda (1965), and Nishigauchi (1986 and 1990), indefinite noun phrases
and wh-phrases are considered to be indeterminate nominals functioning as a variable,
which must be bound by an appropriate operator in the course of derivation (at a discourse
level). When the indefinite noun phrase someone in the antecedent clause in (17a) has nooperator to bind it, an existential operator is inserted to bind the indefinite noun phrase as avariable. Otherwise, the indefinite noun phrase would not be interpreted appropriately andwould be ruled out at LF. We can see this in Japanese. In fact, in Japanese, the existential
quantifier morpheme ka occurs attached with an indefinite noun phrase.
46

Without themorpheme, the sentence will be unacceptable. See (18).

(18) a.

Taro-ganani-ka-wo

katta.

Taro-Nom something-∃-Acc buy-Past‘Taro bought something.’
b. *Taro Nani-wo kata.

Following this line of analysis, CLM claim that the LF structure of the antecedent clause of(17a) is represented as in (19), where the indefinite noun phrase someone in the object
position taken as a restricted free variable is bound by the existential operator, and an
appropriate interpretation is provided due to existential closure. The first conjunct in (17a)is roughly represented as (19).

(19) a.
b.

[TP John [VP saw someone]](∃x) [TP John saw person (x) ]How is the interpretation of the elided clause retrieved under this mechanism? Since the
TP following the wh-phrase in the second conjunct of (17a) is empty, there is no variable forthe base-generated wh-phrase to bind. Thus, the antecedent structure of TP is copied into
the empty sites as (20b).

(20) a.
b.

[CP who [C´ e [TP John [saw someone ]]]]
(which x) [John saw person(x) ]Due to the recycling/copying operation of the TP in the first conjunct into the empty site in
the second conjunct in (20) and a subsequent interpretive operation, called “Merger,” which
relates the variable in the recycled LF structure to the binder in the elided clause, theindefinite noun phrase is bound by the wh-operator and then the correct interpretation comesout without violating the conditions related to movement across islands.
Notice here that an indefinite noun phrase in the antecedent clause functions as a variable,
47

and the wh-phrase in the Spec-CP binds it as a result of copying and Merger.

The

derivation of SS depends largely on the establishment of this operator-variable relation in
the elided clause after recycling. Since no movement is applied in their analysis, no island
condition would be violated. Take (13a), for example, repeated as (21a), where the whphrase is assumed to be base-generated in the embedded Spec-CP. The LF structures ofthe first and the second conjunct in (21a) will be (21b) and (21c), respectively. After
recycling, the second conjunct will be represented as in (21d).

(21) a.

She kissed a man who bit one of my friends, but Tom doesn’t realize which
one of my friends.

b.

∃x [TP She kissed a man who bit (one of my friends(x))]

c.

Tom doesn’t realize which one of my friends (x) [CP e [TP e ]]d.

Tom doesn’t realize [which one of my friends (x) [CP e [TP she kissed a man
who bit (one of my friends (x))]]As seen in (21d), the long-distance binding for the indefinite noun phrase over the relative
clause holds, and as a result, the target interpretation is retrieved.
Their analysis seems to be promising in that the insensitivity of the violation of an island
condition is explained. If the LF Recycling approach was plausible, however, one may ask
how we should account for the examples Ross (1969) and Merchant (2001) pointed out withrespect to Case-valuing and preposition stranding? Particularly, it needs to be clarified
how their LF Recycling approach can explain the facts about Case-valuing? Recall that
Ross’s (1969) observation on remnant wh-phrases shows a possibility of Case-valuing with
an element in a deleted site, not with that in the matrix clause, supporting the PF Deletion
approach. The examples in in question are (4) and (5), repeated as (22) and (23).

(22) a.

Ralph is going to invite somebody from Kankakee to the party, but they
don’t know who/whom he is going to invite to the party.

b.

Ralph is going to invite somebody from Kankakee to the party, but they
don’t know who/whom.
48

(23) a.

Somebody from Kankakee is going to be invited to the party by Ralph, butthey don’t know who/*whom is going to be invited to the party by Ralph.

b.

Somebody from Kankakee is going to be invited to the party by Ralph, butthey don’t know who/*whom.

(Ross (1969:254))

In order to explain the (un)grammaticality of (22) and (23), it has been assumed that a Casevaluing element should exist in the structure, undergoing the deletion at the later stage.
Thus, the examples above make their LF Recycling approach look weak. They suggestthat their analysis does not cause any problems with this, because they assume that Casevaluing is induced at LF after the recycling operation. Since the Case feature of the whphrase is assumed to be valued not in Syntax, but at LF, it is claimed that their analysis stillholds for SS.

3. 3. 1. 2 Some Problems with LF-Recycling
The analysis by CLM based on TP Recycling at LF seems to be plausible in that theobviation of violation of island conditions can be explained, and by assuming LF Casemarking, the issues on Ross’s observation on Case-valuing also appear to be solved.
However, if we adapt their analysis to other contexts, we will see that their scenario is notnecessarily so attractive.

In fact, there are some empirical and theoretical problems

observed even under the assumption of LF Case-valuing and the establishment of theoperator-variable relation.
First, it is not straightforward or easy to believe that LF Case-valuing actually holds. If
Case-valuing was induced at LF, what mechanism would allow a wh-phrase located in the
CP to receive its value in strict cyclic derivation. In addition, it remains to be explained
what motivates A-movement. See (24).

(24) a. *Was hit Mary by John.
b.

Mary was hit by John.

c.

John seems to be optimistic.

d. *Seems John to be optimistic.
49

Traditionally, (24a) and (24d) are considered to be ungrammatical because the subject DPs
are not Case-assigned in Syntax.

That is, A-movement should be induced by therequirement of Case of a DP, which rules out DPs with [-Case] at PF, and all DPs should bein a Case-assigned position when spelled-out. One may claim that the ungrammaticalexamples in (24) come from the unsaturated EPP feature. However, as assumed in thecurrent framework, if movement to a head with an EPP feature requires AGREE relation
between a probe and its goal as a prerequisite, there should be a Case-valuing element in
Syntax to derive (24b) and (24c). This means that Case-valuing should not be induced at
LF.3 Therefore, it is more plausible to assume that Case feature should be valued by acertain element in the syntactic component and thus, it is more promising to suppose that
constructed structures should exist before deletion, and the PF Deletion approach based on
Ross’s observation can still be supported.
Second, does the relation between a WH-operator and the copied indefinite noun phrase
as a sort of variable really hold?

As Merchant (2001) points out and CLM also

acknowledge, the LF Recycling approach will have difficulties explaining theungrammaticality of (25).

(25) *Who did you see someone yesterday?

If an indefinite noun phrase such as someone counts as a variable and an operator is inserted
at a point of its derivation to bind it, why is it impossible for the wh-operator to bind theindefinite noun phrase in (25), instead of the existential operator? If someone is taken as avariable, the structure would be represented as (26), where someone, (person(x)), is boundby the wh-operator. However, this relation is impossible.

(26) Which x [you saw person (x)]Third, there is a theoretical problem, which is crucial in the minimalist framework
assuming strictly cyclic derivation. If efficient computation and SMT must strictly beobeyed, a derivation should go phase by phase. This means that the LF Recycling that50

attempts to copy more than one phasal complex into other categories will require a heavy
burden such as “late-merge.”4 This operation is not an optimal solution to the interfaces.
Given the discussion here, we can conclude that the LF Recycling operation does not seemto be adequate enough as a minimalist analysis of SS. Therefore, another account must be
explored to explain the phenomena found in SS in a more optimal way.

3. 3. 2 PF Deletion
Although the LF Copying/Recycling approach appears prima facie appealing, we havejust seen that there are some empirical and theoretical problems with the approach. In thissection, let us examine accounts based on PF Deletion which was first proposed by Ross
(1969) and has been developed under the PF Deletion approach since then (Chomsky (1972),
Fox and Lasnik (2003), Merchant (2001, 2008)). Before examining the accounts, take abrief look at another example supporting the PF Deletion approach which has not been
introduced so far. After introducing the example, we will review and examine the previous
analyses by Ross (1969), Chomsky (1972), Fox and Lasnik (2003), Merchant (2001, 2008),
and Hartman (2011). Ross and Chomsky attempt to explain SS by violation repair, andFox and Lasnik address SS in terms of structural identity. Merchant and Hartman analyze
SS based on semantic identity and maximal deletion.

3. 3. 2. 1 Some Evidence to Support PF Deletion Approach
There is strong evidence to support the argument for the PF Deletion approach. We havealready observed some facts related to Case-valuing and preposition stranding in the earlysections and chapters.

We have also seen that the assumption that fully constructedstructures are deleted at a certain stage of derivation could explain these facts morenaturally.5 Here, let us see another empirical fact supporting the PF Deletion approach.
The fact involves number agreement in the matrix clause.

(27) a.

He’s going to give us some old problems for the test, but which problems
isn’t clear.

b.

Which problems aren’t clear and easy to do?
51(Ross (1969: 256))In (27b) where the subject is a plural DP, the form of the matrix verb shows the relevant
agreement in accordance with the plural subject. However, in (27a), where the antecedentclause seems to follow the remnant wh-phrase in the second conjunct, the verb form bears
singular agreement even though the remnant is a plural wh-phrase. Furthermore, similar
examples are given below.

(28) a.

The linguists want to solve some problems, but which problems they wantto solve is/*are still unclear.

b.

The linguists want to solve some problems, but which problems is/*are still
unclear.

(29) a.

A lot of people are coming to the conference, but exactly how many people
are coming to the conference matters/*matter to us.

b.

A lot of people are coming to the conference, but exactly how many people
matters/*matter to us.

Given the facts above, it is possible to believe that the unsaid structure has existed andentered into the agreement relation before undergoing deletion.

This means that thecategory of the elided structure dominating the wh-phrase is not DP, but CP. The fact
related to number agreement makes the PF Deletion approach strong and plausible enoughto believe. This enables us to conclude that the approach of “What You See is What You
Get (WYSIWG)” proposed by Culicover and Jackendoff (2005) can never explain thesefacts adequately.6

3. 3. 2. 2 PF Deletion Approach: Violation Repair by Ross (1969) and Chomsky (1972)
Now, let us see one of the proposals for the PF Deletion approach. If the PF deletion
approach, under which structures once constructed are deleted at the PF, is on the right track,
how is the derivation of SS accounted for? First, we will consider the analyses provided
by Ross (1969) and Chomsky (1972), which rely largely on repairing a violation of
conditions. Ross claims that there is a deletion rule, “Sluicing,” included in the linguistic52

theory, which is assumed to follow the application of “Question Formation (wh-movement
in a current term).” The application of this deletion rule contributes to the improvement of
the violation of the island condition. See (13), for example, repeated as (30).

(30) a. *She kissed a man who bit one of my friends, but Tom doesn’t realize which
one of my friends she kissed a man who bit.
b.

She kissed a man who bit one of my friends, but Tom doesn’t realize which
one of my friends.

In order to account for the fact above, Ross explains descriptively that “[i]f a node is moved
out of its island, an ungrammatical sentence will result. If the island-forming node does
not appear in the surface structure, violations of lesser severity will (in general) ensue” (Ross(1969: 277)). This means that a wh-phrase can move across island boundaries somehow,
but its violation is canceled by the subsequent deletion rule at the PF.
Ross’s proposal had a huge impact on analyses of other elided phenomena, and is stillwidely accepted by linguists interested in the phenomena. Chomsky (1972), building on
Ross’s (1969) argument, attempts to formalize the account in terms of violations ofconstraints on transformations and well-formedness on the LF/PF interfaces. According
to Chomsky (1972: 72), every time a wh-phrase is moved across an island boundary by whmovement, a sort of feature, “#,” which will eventually make sentences ill-formed, isassigned to a relevant category. The categories assigned this unwanted # feature are stillinterpretable in a sense, but are judged not to be well-formed by a filter-like rule. However,if the #-assigned categories are erased by applying the deletion rule, Sluicing, in the courseof its derivation, the sentence will be eventually remedied.

The derivation of (30) is

illustrated as in (31).

(31) a. *She kissed a man who bit one of my friends, but Tom doesn’t realize[which one of my friends]i she kissed [# NP a man [CP who bit ti]].
b. She kissed a man who bit one of my friends, but Tom doesn’t realize [which
one of my friends]i she kissed [# NP a man [CP who bit ti]]53

As shown in (31), even if the # is assigned to the relevant category by the wh-movement
violating the island condition, the grammaticality of the sentence will be obtained by thedeletion as in (31b).
It is true that Chomsky’s proposal is very fascinating in implying that judgement ofviolation of constraints can be delayed until a later stage of derivation, specifically at a laterstage of PF. However, again, there seem to be some empirical and theoretical problems
with Chomsky’s analysis. First, as Fox and Lasnik (2003) and Merchant (2008) among
others point out, even though the problematic # appears to have been deleted, there are somecases which can be judged as ungrammatical. Consider (32).

(32) a. *They want to hire someone who speaks a Balkan language, but I don’t
remember which (Balkan language) they want to hire someone who speaks.
b.

They want to hire someone who speaks a Balkan language, but I don’t
remember which.

(Merchant (2008: 136))

c. *They want to hire someone who speaks a Balkan language, but I don’t
remember which they do.

(Merchant (2008: 138))

The (un)grammaticality of the non-elided (32a) and the sluiced (32b) is what we can expectfrom our discussion so far. However, as in (32c), even though the lowest v*P (VP) in thesluiced conjunct is deleted by VP Deletion and the unwanted elements seem to havedisappeared, the sentence is still bad. Chomsky’s analysis incorrectly expects (32c) to begrammatical because all islands or categories given #s are gone.

This means that theaccounts by Ross and Chomsky are not satisfactory enough to explain correctly thephenomena of SS in (32).
A second problem is about the identity between the antecedent and the elided clause.
Their formulations are not strict enough to guarantee the parallelism between the antecedentand elided sites. As seen in the previous chapters, a certain kind of recoverability condition
or identity condition is required in order to license deletion and provide an appropriate
interpretation. Under their analyses, it is not clear what kind of identity underlies in SS or
how the applicability of deletion and semantic interpretation of the elided site can be54determined.
Another problem is more theoretical than empirical. Chomsky’s analysis in which the# feature is assigned in a course of derivation would not be theoretically well-supported. It
is not clear enough how the # feature is introduced to the derivation. The introduction of
the # feature would violate the Inclusiveness Condition within the current framework. As
assumed in this paper, inserting or creating elements that have not been initially present in a
derivation should be strictly prohibited.

Therefore, theoretically speaking, the #assignment to relevant categories is unacceptable within the current framework. Anothertheoretical problem associated with this is why this kind of condition-violating movement
is possible in the first place. If derivations were strictly cyclic, this kind of movement
should never take place.

Thus, it should be abandoned as not conforming to optimal

solutions.
As an alternative analysis, Fox and Lasnik (2003) attempt to propose another accountbased on Choice Function by Heim (1982) and Reinhart’s (1997) observation. We will see
their analysis in the next section.

3. 3. 2. 3 PF Deletion Approach: Violation Repair by Fox and Lasnik (2003)
3. 3. 2. 3. 1 Parallelism of LF Structures and Choice Function
Fox and Lasnik (2003) assume a choice function suggested by Reinhart (1997) and an
existential closure proposed by Heim (1982) to ensure that an operator-variable dependency
is established for an indefinite noun phrase. They also claim that a kind of parallelism
requirement based on the dependency forces a wh-phrase to move directly to the CP, which
eventually provides a solution to the empirical and theoretical problems pointed out above.
Besides the examples presented by Merchant (2001), Fox and Lasnik show more
grammatical differences between SS and VP Deletion. The examples below, altered here
from the examples provided by Fox and Lasnik (2003: 147-148), were originally cited by
CLM and Merchant (2001).

(33) a. *It appears that a certain senator will resign, but which senator [it appears thatt will resign] is still a secret.
55

b.

It appears that a certain senator will resign, but which senator is still a secret.

c. *It appears that a certain senator will resign, but which senator it does is stilla secret.
(34) a. *Sally asked if somebody was going to fail Syntax One, but I can’t remember
who [Sally asked if t was going to fail Syntax One].
b.

Sally asked if somebody was going to fail Syntax One, but I can’t remember
who.

c. *Sally asked if somebody was going to fail Syntax One, but I can’t remember
who she did.
(35) a. *She said that a biography of one of the Marx brothers is going to be publishedthis year, but I don’t remember which [she said that a biography of t is going
to be published this year].
b.

She said that a biography of one of the Marx brothers is going to be publishedthis year, but I don’t remember which.

c. *She said that a biography of one of the Marx brothers is going to be publishedthis year, but I don’t remember which she did.

In (32)-(35), the (a) sentences with an illegitimate island are severely ungrammaticalunlike the (b) sentences. However, the (c) sentences where VP is deleted is not acceptable,
either, even though all problematic violations appear to be deleted. Moreover, even whena sentence does not include any violation of the island condition at all as in (36b), it does not
become grammatical.

(36) a.

They said they heard about a Balkan language, but I don’t know which
Balkan language (they said they heard about).

b. *They said they heard about a Balkan language, but I don’t know which
Balkan language they did.

Given these facts, it is reasonable to reject Chomsky’s analysis based on the #. Thus, let
us review Fox and Lasnik’s proposal as an alternative analysis in this section.
56

In order to address the problems above, Fox and Lasnik assume, following CML’s
observation based on Heim (1982), that indefinite noun phrases must be bound by anexistential quantifier (existential closure) and a wh-phrase in the sluiced clause must bindthe trace of the wh-phrase left by wh-movement in a parallel way: Parallelism. Particularly,
as for binding relation, they assume, following Reinhart (1997), that both an indefinite noun
and a wh-phrase involve a dependency established by quantification over choice function.
Given these assumptions, the LF representation of each clause in (37a) will be like (37b),
where the pied-piped material girl in the wh-phrase is interpreted at the tail by deleting it at
the head.

(37) a.

Fred said that I talked to a certain girl, but I don’t know which girl[Fred said that I talked to t].

b.

(Fox and Lasnik (2003: 149))∃f λf´ [Fred said that I talked to f´(girl)], but I don’t know
which g girl λg´ <Fred said that I talked to g´(girl)>

In (37), an indefinite noun phrase is bound by existential closure in the antecedent clause
while the trace of the wh-phrase is bound by the original wh-phrase in a parallel way. As
a result, these identical dependencies eventually satisfy the requirement of the parallelism,
and SS is correctly derived.7 This is consistent with CLM’s analysis. In fact, the example
below is ruled out due to the mismatch of the parallelism of binding dependencies.

(38) a. *Fred said that a certain girl talked to John, but I don’t know which girl[Fred said that I talked to t].
b.

∃f λf´ [Fred said that f´(girl) talked to John], but I don’t know
which g girl λg´ <Fred said that I talked to g´(girl)>

In (38a), the position of the trace of the wh-phrase does not correspond to that of theindefinite noun phrase in the antecedent clause. The former is in the object position while
the latter is in the subject position. Since the binding relations in this case are not identicaland cannot satisfy the Parallelism, (38a) is ruled out as expected.
57Based on this assumption, Fox and Lasnik attempt to explain the problems in discussion.
According to them, wh-movement must be strictly local and successive-cyclic, and thus awh-phrase has to go through intermediate maximal projections. However, the requirementof Parallelism is so strong as to force a wh-phrase in the sluiced clause to move to theoperator position in a “one-fell-swoop” fashion. Thanks to deletion, non-successive cyclic
wh-movement, which otherwise could cause a serious locality problem, becomes possible.
This mechanism can explain normal SS in discussion without any complexities. See forexample the sentences in (32), repeated as (39).

(39) a. *They want to hire someone who speaks a Balkan language, but I don’t
remember which (Balkan language) they want to hire someone who
speaks.
b.

They want to hire someone who speaks a Balkan language, but I don’t
remember which.

c. *They want to hire someone who speaks a Balkan language, but I don’t
remember which they do.

The representation of (39) is illustrated as below.

(40) ∃f λf´ [They want to hire someone who speaks f(Balkan language),but I don’t remember
which bl (Balkan language) λbl´ <they want to hire someone who speaks
bl (Balkan language)>.

The existential quantifier binds non-locally the indefinite noun phrase a Balkan language.
Therefore, the Parallelism requires the one-time-movement of the wh-phrase across theisland, but its violation is repaired by deletion.
The analysis based on Parallelism and cancellation of violations can explain the problem
we have presented in the last part of the previous section. See the problematic case (39c)again. Given the discussion so far, (39c) is represented as (41).
58

(41) ∃f λf´ [They want to hire someone who speaks f(Balkan language), but I don’t
remember which bl (Balkan language) λbl´ [TP they [AspP do <want to hiresomeone who speaks bl´(Balkan language)>].

The Parallelism requires the wh-phrase to move directly in a one-time manner to the leftmost
position even though the wh-phrase is supposed to move in a strictly successive cyclic way.
Within a strict cyclic derivation, every maximal projection forms a sort of island. Thus,
the two maximal projections, TP and ASPP in this case, should also have been deleted forthe sentence to be grammatical. Fox and Lasnik’s proposal seems more plausible andmore convincing than those by Ross and Chomsky in that (39c) is explained as above.

3. 3. 2. 3. 2 Problems with Fox and Lasnik’s Analysis
Unfortunately, some questions still arise immediately with Fox and Lasnik’s analysis.
Their proposal seems to be able to overcome the problems with the PF Deletion approachby formulating structural parallelism and identity between the antecedent and elided clausesby the parallel fashion of the existential closure of an indefinite noun and a one-fell-swoop
movement of the wh-phrase.
However, there are some questions still unanswered. First of all, the problem of theapplicability of island-crossing movement still remains unsolved. It is unclear why noncyclic wh-movement is still possible when their parallelism requires it.

Their most

attractive suggestion is that a wh-phrase in the elided clause moves in a one-fell-swoop
fashion to obey the parallelism based on the operator-variable dependency identical with thedependency in the antecedent clause. They assume that this movement would never cause
any problems because its island violation could be ignored as a result of PF Deletion, andthis is considered to be one of the special properties in SS. However, it is not clear whatmechanism allows the parallelism to force a wh-phrase to move to the CP by a one-time
operation.

Given a conventional assumption that a wh-phrase undergoes strictly

successive-cyclic movement in terms of the phase-based theory proposed by Chomsky(2000) and the syntactic component does not have much to do with semantic conditions, it
should be clarified how this tricky operation is possible in the syntactic component. They59

do not provide any concrete account of this.
Second, Fox and Lasnik do not define well what makes up boundaries. According tothem, maximal projections such as a TP and AspP appear to be considered as possible
landing sites for a wh-phrase to go through. One possibility to support their assumption isto suppose, as Takahashi (1994) claims, that every maximal projection can be a sort ofboundaries, but no clear definition is provided.

Under the phase-based theory in thecurrent minimalist framework in discussion, a category which Fox and Lasnik take as apossible landing site are not regarded as a head attracting a movement operation, but v*Pand CP phases can be ones to induce movement operations when necessary. Therefore,
their account for the contrast between SS and VP Deletion will not be convincing enough.
In order to solve the contrast in question, Merchant (2001, 2008) and Hartman (2011)provide alternative analyses, particularly in terms of maximal deletion, which claim that adeletion operation should be applied to as large a constituent as possible. In the following
section, I will consider how their analysis explains the problem.

3. 3. 2. 4 PF Deletion Approach: Short Source by Marchant (2001) and Maximal
Deletion by Merchant (2008) and Hartman (2011)
Merchant (2001) attempts to provide an interesting explanation based on “short source”
for the applicability of wh-movement in SS. Furthermore, Merchant (2008) and Hartman(2011) also propose intriguing analyses with similar ideas to explain the contrast between
SS and VP Deletion in (40). The basic idea of their proposals claims that deletion sites
should be as large as possible, as long as the elided clause is semantically identical to its
antecedent clause. Here, I will first take a look at Merchant’s (2001) analysis and then turnto Merchant (2008) analysis.8
Let us take (39a), repeated as (42), for example.

(42) They want to hire someone who speaks Balkan language, but I don’t remember
which Balkan language [TP they [VP want to hire [DP someone who speaks
Balkan language]]].

60

Following Schwarzschild’s (1999) focus condition and e-givenness, Merchant (2001)
assumes that a deletable category and its antecedent must have LF structures that aresemantically identical to each other. Schwarzschild assumes that for a sentence involving
focused elements to be licensed, there must be elements other than focus marked elementsin the antecedent clause or preceding context, and they must at least imply the content of thefollowing clause. Based on this, Merchant assumes that an antecedent and its elided clausehave to share the same implicature. In order to see how his analysis works, let us first see
the definition of e-GIVENness and a condition on TP ellipsis in the case of SS. The former
is slightly modified by Merchant (2001).9(43) Focus condition on TP-ellipsis
A TP α can be deleted only if α is e-given.

(Merchant (2001: 31))(44) e-GIVENness
An expression E counts as e-GIVEN iff E has a salient antecedent A and,modulo ∃-type shifting,(i) A entails F-clo(E), and(ii) E entails F-clo(A)(Merchant (2001: 31))(45) F-closure
The F-closure of α, written F-Clo (α) is the result of replacing F-marked partsof α with ∃-bound variables of the appropriate type (modulo ∃-type shifting).
(Merchant (2001: 14))

Note that there are no phonetically focus-marked elements inside an elided clause. Besides,
as discussed above, indefinite noun phrases and the traces or copies of wh-phrases count asa variable that must be bound by a relevant operator (existential closure).10
Furthermore, Merchant assumes that an island condition on a relative clause has much to
do with an effect at LF, and the Sluicing operation as PF Deletion cannot rule in SS because
the deleted island still can be seen at LF. Thus, he suggests that the embedded TP in thesluiced clause of (42) should be reduced and paraphrased into a smaller TP as in (46).

61

(46) They want to hire someone who speaks Balkan language, but I don’t remember
which (Balkan language) [TP she speaks t].

Since (46) has a “short” TP with no island involved in it, wh-movement does not violate any
island condition. Assuming (43)-(44), Merchant claims that deletion of TP in the second
conjunct will be possible when the TP has a semantically corresponding TP in the precedingclause. The first conjunct in (46) implies that there is a Balkan language x, and someone
speaks x while the second clause means that the person speaks x. Given this meaning, the
LF structure of (46) can be roughly represented as (47).

(47) F-clo (TPA) = ∃x. [TP someone who speaks x]
F-clo (TPE) = ∃x. [TP she speaks x ]]]Since the structures in (47) are semantically identical to each other, the TP in the second
conjunct can be deleted under the conditions in (43)-(45).
However, this analysis is not satisfactory enough. The problem of the wh-movement
violating island conditions seems to have been solved, but this analysis cannot explain theungrammaticality of (39c), repeated as (48).

(48)*They want to hire someone who speaks a Balkan language, but I don’t
remember which they do.

Since the non-reduced structure is not available in the case of VP Deletion like (48), theungrammaticality cannot be accounted for.
In addition, Lasnik (2001) points out that it will cause another problem when a boundpronoun is included in a sentence. See (49).

(49) Every linguisti met a philosopher who criticized some of hisi work, but I am notsure [how much of hisi work] [every linguisti met a philosopher who criticized t ].

62

If the TP in the elided clause was reduced like (46), the bound pronoun his in (49) would
not be properly bound.11

Therefore, the analysis based on short source is not well

supported.
We should ask how cases of VP Deletion such as (48) can be explained. Merchant(2008) proposes an inevitable condition, called “MaxElide” below, and claims that the VP
projection in SS cannot be a target to delete, because there are more maximal projections
dominated by the TP, which must be candidates to undergo deletion.

(50) MaxElideLet XP be an elided constituent containing an A´-trace. Let YP be a possible
target for deletion. YP must not properly contain XP (XP ⊉ YP)(Merchant (2008: 141))

Suppose that a wh-phrase can move, crossing island nodes as Chomsky (1972) assumes.

(51) which Balkan language x [TP they [do [VP want to hire someone who speaks x ]]]Then, suppose also that the antecedent and elided clause have the identical LF representation,
and a certain kind of parallelism is semantically satisfied. The MaxElide (50) requires thatthe largest category TP dominating the VP be an only possible target for deletion because
the other categories are considered to be smaller than the TP. Therefore, the option ofdeleting the VP is not admitted.

This analysis explains the ungrammaticality of VP

Deletion in the SS context like (48).
Merchant’s proposals are interesting in that they can explain some of the existing
problems: in particular, the satisfaction of parallelism, the locality condition of whmovement, and the ban on a subject and an auxiliary being left as remnants in the sluiced
clause. However, there are theoretical and empirical problems raised in his analysis, too,some of which we have already seen. Considering the SMT assumed in this paper, what
does MaxElide come from? It is not clarified what principle in the interfaces requires amaximal projection to be deleted?

It may be argued that eliding maximal projections
63

reduces load of pronouncing in utterance, but no explanation on this question is presented.
Besides, it is just a descriptive assumption that MaxElide only cares of an A´-trace, but not
a A-trace.12 No specific or principled reasons are provided at all. Therefore, the previous
explanations I have just examined above are not satisfactory enough.

3. 4 A Non-movement Analysis of Sluicing
3. 4. 1 Proposals: Overview
To sum up the points discussed so far, it is reasonable to put my attention about SS mainly
on two points. One is about the reasons for the obviation of island conditions of whmovement in SS. That is, my question is why, in the first place, a wh-phrase can moveacross islands, violating island conditions in so doing, and take wide scope over a matrix
clause. It is worthwhile to ask whether a wh-phrase in SS is literally moved across islands,
namely, phase boundaries assumed in the current minimalist framework. There might bea possibility that a wh-phrase would not move except some cases while it can be interpreted
by some device. Eventually, I will claim that violation of island conditions in SS is only
apparent, but the appropriate interpretation becomes available by extending Baker’s (1970)
idea of Q-morpheme and the adjacent relation between the Q-morpheme and a wh-phrase
obtained by deletion.
The other is an identity between the antecedent site and the elided site, namely parallelism.
As the examples below indicate, it is obvious that there is a certain condition to license
deletion of an embedded TP.

(52) a.

He likes a certain girl, but I don’t know who (he likes t).

b. *He likes the girl, but I don’t know who (he likes t).
c.

He likes ABBY, but I don’t know who else (he likes t).

d. *He likes Abby, but I don’t know who else (he likes t).
(53) a.

A certain girl loves him, but I don’t know who ( t loves him).

b. *?The certain girl loves him, but I don’t know who ( t loves him).
c.

ABBY loves him, but I don’t know who else ( t loves him).

d. *?Abby loves him, but I don’t know who else ( t loves him).
64

(54) a.

John saw Mary, and Bill did [vP see Mary].

b. *John saw Mary, and Bill did [vP see Jane].

Like other elliptical constructions such as VP Deletion, SS would not be permitted either,unless an element in the antecedent clause corresponding to a remnant wh-phrase in theelided clause was an indefinite noun phrase or a focused DP. Evidently, there should be acertain formalized semantic or syntactic condition that would have to license SS. Unlike
other ellipsis constructions, strict identity is not easy to apply to SS. Thus, I calm that only
when intended semantics of an elided clause is presupposed or implied in the antecedentclause, deletion can be applied to the relevant structure.

More specifically, when thedependencies between an operator and its variable in both the antecedent and the elided
clause are identical to each other at LF: LF structural Parallelism, deletion is possible toapply. Besides, when deletion is applied, its elliptical effect should be applied maximallyto the parts implied or presupposed (marked [Presupposed]) by semantics of theircorresponding antecedent parts. In other words, deletion is applied to the presupposed sites
except focus marked elements. Below is the brief overview of the proposals I would liketo propose.

(55) 1. In SS, a wh-phrase does not undergo wh-movement to a Spec-CP, but except
some cases, it is bound in situ by Baker’s abstract question morpheme (Qmorpheme) located on a C-Head.
2. The Q-morpheme has to be phonologically adjacent with a wh-phrase inlanguages with wh-movement such as English, but it does not have to inlanguages without the movement such as Japanese. (Adjacency requirement)13
3. LF Structural Parallelism: Phonological deletion is licensed only if the LF
structure of a category that contains elided material is structurally
isomorphic to that of the antecedent.
4. Maximal Effect of Deletion
Delete elements marked as [Presupposed] except focus-marked [F] elements.

65

Before analyzing SS under (55), I will show where these assumptions come from.

3. 4. 2 Abstract Question Morpheme (Q-morpheme) and Elements in situ
First, I would like to explore one possible alternative formation of wh-movement which
I will depend on in this paper. My assumption on wh-movement is built largely on the Qmorpheme proposed by Baker (1970). I would like to extend his analysis and assume that
the Q-morpheme is located on a C-Head as a sort of an operator to bind wh-phrases, andalso requires a wh-phrase to be phonologically adjacent to the morpheme in certain contexts.
This could explain the language variations of overt/covert properties of wh-movement.
Under the minimalist framework, it has been assumed that in languages such as English, awh-phrase is overtly moved to Spec-CP by the Edge feature on C-Head, while this does not
happen in languages such as Japanese and Chinese due to the non-existence of the Edge
feature in those languages. Instead, extending Baker’s Q-morpheme observation into thecurrent minimalist framework, I would like to assume that the Q-morpheme has, in nature,properties of an operator binding a wh-phrase in situ, and the English-type Q-morpheme
requires (at least) one wh-phrase to be phonologically adjacent to the morpheme while theJapanese/Chinese type Q-morpheme does not. This leads to enabling us to claim that awh-phrase in English SS stays in situ, receiving an appropriate interpretation when deletion
under Parallelism and Maximal Effect of Deletion makes it possible for the morpheme toreach the variable in a remote position, satisfying the adjacency requirement.

In thissection, I would like to see Baker’s observations and discuss how we can adapt his analysis
to our assumption.
As a matter of fact, a wh-phrase in English must move to a Spec-CP in a single
interrogative question, regardless of direct or indirect questions, and a lot of facts have been
observed indicating that at least one wh-phrase moves to the position in the context. An
instance of so-called “echo” questions in (56) shows a wh-phrase could originate in aposition different from where it is actually pronounced in a normal wh-question. Compare(56) and (57).

66

(56) A: I finally bought a BMW!
B: You bought what?
A: I said, I finally bought a Z4, BMW!
(57) A: What car did you buy t ?
B: I bought a Z4, BMW.

As seen above, in English normal wh-questions, a wh-phrase corresponding to its answer
is moved to the Spec-CP. As introduced in Chapter 2, it has been assumed within theminimalist program that this movement is induced by the Edge feature on the C-Head under
AGREE in the Q-feature, which is roughly illustrated as in (58).

(58) [CP what [C[Edge] [TP you T [vP t [v [VP bought t ]]]]?

Under this system, a wh-phrase in English must be overtly moved due to the property of thestrong EDGE feature on C-Head while a Japanese wh-phrase is not moved because thefeature is weak or not present on the head. The difference in the strength of the Edge
feature is, thus, attributed to the variation of wh-movement while the unvalued Q-feature, ifany, is valued in either case.
However, there appears to be more to the story. More accounts need to be presented todeal with other facts. For example, natural languages allow multiple wh-phrases to occur
in a single sentence regardless of a direct interrogative or an indirect interrogative. Below
is an instance of multiple wh-questions, which allows a pair list reading as its answer.

(59) A: Who brought what for our White Elephant yesterday?
B: Dice brought a calendar, Jackie (brought) gloves, and Adam (brought) a
funny pen.

The fact that (B) is a possible answer to (A) in (59) indicates that the second wh-phrase canbe interpreted in accordance with the first wh-phrase even though it stays in situ.
There are more complex cases, in which the lowest wh-phrase in the embedded clause67

serves as a question element asking for an answer even when an island intervenes between
the matrix clause and the embedded clause.

(60) Who remembers where we bought which book?

(Baker (1970: 215))

In fact, (60) is ambiguous in two ways. One is the case in which the sentence is concernedwith the first wh-phrase with the other wh-phrases related to the embedded clause. Thus,
its answer will be like (61).

(61) John and Martha remember where we bought which book. (Baker (1970: 215))

The other interpretation is worth discussing because the third wh-phrase can be related andinterpreted together with the first upmost one even when it is deeply embedded below thesecond wh-phrase. Indeed, (62) is another possible answer to (60).

(62) John remembers where we bought the physics book and Martha and Ted
remember where we bought The Wizard of Oz.

(Baker (1970: 215))

These facts have long challenged linguists to clarify what mechanism makes this answer
possible; indeed, several papers seeking to clarify this query have been published by
Higginbotham and May (1981), Lasnik and Saito (1992) among them. Higginbotham andMay propose wh-absorption to account for the phenomena. According to them, a whphrase in a lower position is absorbed into the wh-phrase in the initial position, consequently
taking wide scope together with the first wh-phrase. Since their analysis does not rely on
movement, the problem of island-insensitivity seems to be solved.

Lasnik and Saito(1992) attempt to explain this by assuming that LF movement of a wh-phrase is insensitive
to island conditions or the subjacency condition. Even if we apply this notion to the current
framework, their account is still required to answer why LF-movement of a relevant whphrase is possible across island-boundaries, namely phase-boundaries in the framework
assuming successive cyclicity based on phases.
68

Alternatively, Baker (1970) suggests, building on the arguments of Katz and Postal (1964)
and Greenberg (1966), that an abstract question morpheme (Q-morpheme), a sort ofquestion operator, binds wh-phrases “unselectively” in Heim’s (1982) words, providing one
possible solution to the problem. Since Kuroda (1965), it has been traditionally assumed
that indefinite noun phrases, noun phrases with an existential quantifier, and wh-phrases are
considered to be “indeterminate” and function as a “restricted free variable.” Thus, theymust all be bound by their appropriate operator (Heim (1982), CML among others).
Evidence to support this idea is not clearly seen in English, but we can clearly see someinstances in other languages such as Japanese. See (63), for example, as an instance of whphrases in Japanese.

(63) a.

Anata-wa Nani-okaimashita ka

You-Nom whati-Acc bought

Qi‘What did you buy?’
b. *Anata-wa Nani-o
You-Nom what-Acc

kaimashita.
boughtIn Japanese without overt wh-movement, instead of moving wh-phrases, the Q-morphemeka is supposed to bind its associate wh-phrase nani in situ, serving as a sort of wh-operator.
In fact, the wh-phrase without the morpheme will be unacceptable as shown in (63b).
Interestingly, the morpheme ka is able to bind two wh-phrases in Japanese unselectively
even if the second wh-phrase is inside an island. Observe an instance of Japanese multiple
wh-questions and its possible answer in (64).

(64) a.

Kinou

Dare-gaNani-okaimashita ka

yesterday whoi-Nom whatj-Acc boughtQ(i, j)‘Who bought what yesterday?’b.

Mina-wa

Hon-o,

Taro-wa

CD-o, Jiro-wa

chizu-wo kaimashita.

Mina-Nom book-Acc, Taro-Nom CD-Acc, Jiro-Nom map-Acc bought‘Mina bought a book, Taro a CD and Jiro a map.’69

In (64a), the Q-morpheme ka in the sentence final position functions like a wh-operator andbinds both dare and nani unselectively at the same time. As a result, the pair-list answer
in (64b) is possible.
Furthermore, the examples below show that while the Japanese morpheme ka binds a whphrase locally within a clause, it can also bind a wh-phrase across islands.

(65) a.

Taro-wa

Hanako-ga

Darei-ohinanshita kai shitteimasu

Taro-Nom Hanako-Nom who-Acc criticized

Q

know

‘Taro knows who Hanako criticized’
b. A: [[Taro-wa Hanako-ga

darei-ohinanshita kai shitteimasu]j kaj]Taro-Nom Hanako-Nom who-Acc criticized

Q know

Q‘Does Taro know who Hanako criticized?’
B: Hai, (kare-wa) shitteimasu.
Yes, (he-Nom) know
‘Yes, he does.’(66)

A: [[Darei-ga[[Taro-ga

Who-Nom

Nanij-odokok-de katta]

ka k]

Taro-Nom what-Acc where-at bought Q

oboetemasu ka(i, j)]remember Q‘Who remembers where Taro bought what?’
B: Hanako-ga, [[kare-ga kono-hon-odoko-dekatta]

kak]] oboete

Hanako-Nom he-Nom this-book-Acc wherek-at bought Q remember
ori, Jiro-ga[[kare-ga ano -hon-odokok-de kattakak]] oboeteiru

and Jiro-Nom he-Nom that-book-Acc where-at bought Q

remember‘Hanako remembers where he bought this book and Jiro remembers hebought that book.’(adapted from Nishigauchi (1999))

Given that the answer to A in (65b) is possible as B, the inner Q ka binds the wh-phrase dare
locally within the clause in (65b), while the outer ka marks as a Yes-No question the wholesentence without any wh-phrase in the matrix clause. Just like the English example of the70multiple wh-question above, the fact that the pair-list answer is possible as (66B) suggeststhat the outer ka in (66A) can bind the wh-phrase dare in the matrix subject and the whphrase nani in the embedded object unselectively. In this case, the second binding relation
is established across the wh-island boundary. This indicates that a wh-phrase in situ has,in nature, an ability to take a wide scope over a whole clause (see Huang (1982), Lasnik andSaito (1992)). In other words, a wh-phrase in situ can be bound by an operator even acrossan island boundary. Therefore, following Baker (1970), I assume that a sort of operator
called Q-morpheme binds its variable even if it is in a remote position.
Extending Baker’s analysis to the current framework and modifying the theory of theEdge feature-based movement, I assume that the Q-morpheme, which is located on a Cposition, requires at least one wh-phrase to be phonologically adjacent to it in languages
involving wh-movement, while it does not in languages without wh-movement. Under
this assumption, a wh-phrase moves in Syntax to observe the PF output condition. Thus,
the language variation with respect to wh-movement is now attributed to the phonologicalrequirement of the Q-morpheme at PF. If so, this is roughly schematized as in (67).

(67) English-type languagesa.

[CP WHi [[C-Qi] [… [… WHi …]]]](Single wh-question)b.

[CP WHi [[C-Q(i, j)] [… [… WHi […WHj ]]]]](Multiple wh-question)(The italicized WH stands for the copy of a moved wh-phrase. A wh-phrase
must move to a position which is phonologically adjacent to the Q-morpheme.)(68) Japanese-type languagesa.

[CP [C-Qi] [… [… WHi …]]]

(Single wh-question)b.

[CP [C-Q(i, j)] [… [… WHi […WHj ]]]] (Multiple wh-question)

Under the mechanism assumed here, a normal wh-question such as (69a) is illustrated as(69b).

(69) a.
b.

What did you buy yesterday?
[Whati [[C-Qi(did)] [you buy whati yesterday]]]71

In (69b), the moved wh-phrase what is phonologically adjacent to the Q-morpheme, whichbinds the copy of what.
We need an additional assumption for a subject wh-phrase. Suppose that a T-Head has
an EPP feature that attracts a subject to its Specifier position, and the EPP feature moves a
subject wh-phrase to the Spec-TP, too. As Agbayani (2006) and Chomsky (2015b) imply,
let us assume that a subject wh-phrase stops at a TP position because it can become
phonologically adjacent to the Q-morpheme on the C-Head. If so, the position of a subject
wh-phrase is illustrated as (70).

(70) [CP [C-Qi] [TP WH(subject)i T [v*P WH(subject)i …]]]Note that the subject wh-phrase can be located in the Spec-TP, satisfying its EPP feature
because there is no phonological element intervening between the Q-morpheme and theSpec-TP. As Agbayani (2006) suggests, there would be no outstanding output even if asubject wh-phrase moved to the Spec-CP. Therefore, I assume that (67)-(69) are adequate
structures for wh-movement.
Under this system, the possible answers to (60), repeated as (71a) and (72a), come fromthe structures illustrated in (71b) and (72b), respectively.

72

(71) a.
b.

John and Martha remember where we bought which book. = (61)
C(Q)P

C-Qi

TP

PF Adjacent

whoi

T´

T

v*P

whoi

v*´

v*

VP

V

C(Q)P

wherejPF AdjacentC´

C- Q(j. k)

TP

…T…

vP

v …V which bookk … wherej73

(72) a.

John remembers where we bought the physics book and Martha and Ted
remember where we bought The Wizard of Oz.

b.

C(Q)P

C-Q(i, k)

TP

PF Adjacent

whoi

T´

T

v*P

whoi

v*´

v*

VP

V

C(Q)P

wherejPF Adjacent

C´

C- Qj

TP

…T…

vP

v …V which bookk … wherej

In (71), the subject wh-phrase in the matrix clause moves to the matrix Spec-TP to satisfy
the EPP feature and as a result, it results in satisfying the PF adjacency requirement of the
English-type Q-morpheme. The Q-morpheme in the embedded clause attracts where andthe adjacency requirement is satisfied by where at the embedded Spec-CP.

It binds

unselectively the copies of the moved wh-phrase and the in-situ wh-phrase. As a result,
this makes the answer in (71b) possible. On the other hand, in (72), after who has moved74

to the matrix Spec-TP, the Q morpheme binds unselectively both the copies of who and what
inside the wh-island.
Apparently, if CP and v*P count as a phase, there are several phases between the Qmorpheme on C and its variable. It may be questioned, therefore, why the operator canbind its variable across phase boundaries like the structures given above. Under the Phase
Impenetrability Condition (PIC) below, which prevents a syntactic object from moving
directly from inside a phase except its edge, it appears to be difficult to relate the operator toa variable inside a phase.

(73) Phase Impenetrability Condition[ZP Z ... [HP α [H YP]]]
The domain (YP) of H is not accessible to operation outside HP; only H
and its edge α are accessible to such operations.

(Chomsky (2001: 13))
(HP and ZP are phases (vP or CP))

However, Chomsky (2001, 2005) and Chomsky et. al. (2018) suggest that an element in
the complement of the phase head is still accessible from outside the relevant phase unlessthe element undergoes movement or some modifications. Rather, it seems to be possiblethat the PIC admits a Probe-Goal relation across phase boundaries if the probe benefits fromthe relation.

That is, as long as the properties of a Probe are affected within certain

syntactic relations, inter-phase relations are still permitted. In fact, Chomsky et. al. (2017:10) imply that those relations are the unbounded properties of operator-variable,
reconstruction effects, global interpretations of Condition C of the Binding Theory, quirkysubject configurations and so on.

For example, in an Icelandic counterpart to (74) ofEnglish, the T-Head can agree with the object in the complement of the phase head, although
movement of the object is not permitted (Chomsky (2001: 30)).

(74) a.

[Many students] [find]
Dativeb.

[the computers] not ugly.

PluralPlural-Nom[DAT T [v*P v* [NOM…]]]
75

Therefore, following their assumption, it is possible to assume that the Q-morpheme serving
as an operator can bind an element inside a remote phase.
Note that I am assuming that the phonological requirement of the Q-morpheme is an
instance of PF conditions, and thus wh-movement is induced in Syntax. Therefore, whmovement as in (75) is blocked by the PIC, because the wh-phrase cannot be moved acrossthe phases.

(75) a. *Which Balkan languagei do you want to hire someone who speaks ti?
b. *Which Balkan languagei do you believe the rumor that she can speak ti?

Given the discussion here, we can suppose that the Q-morpheme can function as a kind ofoperator which binds a variable (a wh-phrase) or a copy in a remote phase as long as thephonological requirement is obeyed in English-type languages.

(76) i. The Q-morpheme can bind a wh-phrase across phases.
ii. The Q-morpheme requires a wh-phrase to be phonologically adjacent to it inEnglish-type languages although overt wh-movement is sensitive to the PIC.

Based on these assumptions, I argue that English SS including an island can be derived
because a wh-phrase in SS can be bound by the Q-morpheme without wh-movement except
a case of a subject wh-phrase moved to a Spec-TP to delete its EPP feature and a deletion
operation eventually makes the wh-phrase phonologically adjacent to the morpheme.
Huang (1982) and Lasnik and Saito (1992) argue that only overt wh-movement is subject
to the Subjacency condition, showing extensive examples of wh-phrases in situ taking scopeover a matrix clause embedding islands inside. We will see some examples of the facts inthe next section.

3. 4. 3 Wide Scope of Wh-Phrases in situ and Indefinite Noun Phrases: Island
Insensitivity
As we have just seen, in both English and Japanese, a wh-phrase staying in situ has the76

property of being insensitive to a wh-island condition, which would indicate a possibility
that a wh-phrase in a context of SS does not have to be moved except some cases. In order
to see that this can be the case, I will present more examples involving islands in bothlanguages. As for Japanese examples, regardless of whether a wh-phrase is located within
an island, it can be an element to be answered in wh-interrogatives. On the other hand, inEnglish, since only one wh-phrase is allowed to be moved overtly to a relevant position, it
is necessary to examine how a second wh-phrase can be interpreted together with the first
wh-phrase in the matrix clause.

3. 4. 3. 1 Wh-phrases
First, let us see some examples of English multiple questions with an island. Huang(1982) and Lasnik and Saito (1992) argue that the second wh-phrase undergoes LF
movement, which is not subject to Subjacency nor a condition on Extraction Domain(Huang (1982)). Examining the facts below would allow us to suppose that a wh-phrase
in SS could stay in situ. Consider the interpretability of a wh-phrase in a complex nounphrase (relative clause) and an adjunct clause in (77) and (78), respectively.

(77) a. A: Who read the book that criticized who?
B: John read the book that criticized Chomsky, Bill read the book thatcriticized Hornstein, and Tom read the book that criticized Lasnik.
(Okuno and Ogawa (2002: 134))b.
(78) a.

Who read a book that who wrote?

(Reinhart (2006: 66))

Who went to class after he read which book?
(Lasnik and Saito (1992: 12))b.

Who fainted when you attacked whom?

(Reinhart (2006: 65))

(79) Who remembers where we bought what?

It is claimed that in the examples above, the second wh-phrase, which is not overtly movable
out of the island, can be interpreted in accordance with the wh-phrase in the matrix clause.
Along with the account for the interpretability of the multiple wh-question with a wh-island77

in (60), reproduced above as in (79), it can be claimed that the possibility of the pair-list
reading of the multiple wh-questions in (77) and (78) comes from the binding relation
between the Q-morpheme and the wh-phrase, instead of the LF movement, for the reasons
discussed above.
Next, let us see Japanese examples of a wh-phrase in situ taking wide scope over thematrix clause.

Just like the English examples, in addition to the Japanese instances

including a wh-island given above, the same interpretability can be found in other contexts
involving other types of islands. (cf. Huang (1982) and Lasnik and Saito (1992))(80) Complex Nominal Phrasea. [Anata-wa [[Taro-ga dare-o hinanshita toiu] uwasa-o] Shinnjiteru] no.
You-Nom Taro-Nom who-Acc criticized that rumor-Acc believe Q
Lit. ‘Who do you believe the rumor that Taro criticized t?’b. [Anata-wa [dare-ohinanshita otoko]-ni atta] no.

You-Nom who-Acc criticizedman-Acc met Q

Lit. ‘Who did you meet the man who criticized t ?’(81) Adjunct Phrasea. [Anata-wa [Taro-ga dare-ohinanshita kara]

You-Nom Taro-Nom who-Acc criticized because

okotteiru] no.
is-angryQ

Lit. ‘Who are you angry because Taro criticized t ?’b. [Anata-wa [kare-ga dare-otataita atoni] kita ] no.

You-Nom he-Nom who-Acc hit

after

came Q

Lit. ‘Who did you come after he hit?’(82) Chomsky desu.
Chomsky be‘It’s Chomsky.”Note that “no” in (80) and (81) is the same as “ka,” serving as the Q-morpheme. As foreach wh-question above, such an answer as (82) is possible. These examples show that
although overtly moved wh-phrases are strictly restricted within islands, wh-phrases in situ
78are insensitive to islands in both English and Japanese. If covert (LF) movement of whphrases is dispensed with in favor of the probe-goal system and derivation by phases, it canb
be argued that the binding of the Q-morpheme assumed here would be a plausible way of
explaining these facts.

3. 4. 3. 2 Specificity of Indefinite Noun Phrases
What about the properties of an antecedent clause in SS? CLM point out that there must
be an indefinite noun phrase or a focused element in a position in the antecedent clause that
corresponds to the original position of a wh-phrase in the elided clause. Furthermore, an
indefinite noun phrase in the antecedent clause of the SS context tends to have a specificreading, which CLM call a “roofing effect.” According to CLM, SS is only possible whena noun phrase with an existential quantifier takes a wide scope over the first clause. In(83a), for example, the object noun phrase a linguist takes scope over the subject nounphrase everyone although the scope would be ambiguous without the following conjunctwith the sluiced TP.

(83) a. Every student criticized a linguist, but it’s unclear who.
b. She always reads a book at dinnertime. We can't figure out what/which one.
c. Everyone relies on someone. It's unclear who.
d. Both dogs were barking at something, but she didn't know at what/what at.
e. Each student wrote a paper on a Mayan language, but I don't remember which
one.

((b)-(e) from CLM (255))

In fact, some of my informants who agree with the scope ambiguity of an indefinite nounphrase admit that the roofing effect, under which an indefinite noun takes scope over thematrix clause, can be seen in the example like below.

(84) A: Everybody knows that John criticized a certain linguist, but I don’t know
who.
B1: Oh, you don’t? He criticized Noam Chomsky.
79B2: Bill knows that he criticized Noam Chomsky, and Mary knows that hecriticized Howard Lasnik.

They admit that in the context above, B1 is preferred to B2. This suggests that an indefinite
noun phrase in the antecedent clause of SS takes wide scope over the matrix clause, meaningthat a specific thing exists.
It is, therefore, worthwhile to see whether, like wh-phrases in situ, an indefinite nounphrase is not sensitive to island conditions, making possible a wide scope interpretation overa matrix clause. Unlike noun phrases with a strong quantifier such as every, all, most, andso on, there are some examples in which an indefinite noun phrase can take scope over thewhole clause including an island. See the examples below:(85) a.

Everyone reported that Max and some lady had disappeared.

b.

Most guests will be offended if we don’t invite some philosopher.

c.

All students believe anything that many teachers say.

d.

Each teacher overheard the rumor that a student of mine had been called
before dean.

(a-c: Reinhart (2006: 51) d: Fodor and Sag (1982: 374))(86) If we invite some philosopher, Max will be offended.

(Reinhart (2006: 73))

According to Reinhart (2006), the indefinite noun phrase (the italicized noun phrase with anexistential quantifier) in (85) can take a wide scope over the subject in terms of relative scope.
In (86), in particular, the wide scope interpretation of the indefinite is possible in that there
is some philosopher such that if we invite that philosopher, Max will be offended. In orderto capture this interpretation without covert movement such as quantifier raising (QR), she
introduces an existential operator inserted into above a whole sentence with the assumptionthat indefinites are also restricted free variables like wh-phrases, thus bound by theexistential operator. Under this assumption, the indefinite noun phrase some philosopher
is bound as represented in (87a), and as a result, (86) is interpreted as (87b).

(87) a.

∃i [if we invite [some philosopher]i, Max will be offended]80b.

∃(x) ((philosopher (x) & we invite x) à (Max will be offended))

The insertion of this device makes it possible to capture the island insensitivity of indefinites
without assuming a traditional analysis based on QR, and provides a wide scopeinterpretation of an indefinite in situ just in a way similar to the Q-morpheme binding a whphrase.
Note that in Japanese, indefinite noun phrases occur with a kind of morpheme in somecontexts. See (88).

(88) a.

Hanako-wa

Nani-ka-okaimashita.

Hanako-Nom something (what)-Prt-Acc bought‘Hanako bought something.’
b. *Hanako-wa

Nani-okaimashita.

In (88a), the morpheme ka, which seems to happen to be the same as the Japanese question
morpheme, is attached to nani, functioning as a morphologically realized existential operator.
Given that neither wh-phrases nor indefinite noun phrases can occur alone, it is reasonable
to assume that they must be bound by its appropriate operator at a certain point of derivation.
That is, indefinite noun phrases must be bound by their relevant operators like English whphrases. Thus, if I adapt (87a) along with the analysis of the Q-morpheme, I can supposethat a sentence involving an indefinite noun phrase will be represented as (89a), where theexistential quantifier is inserted into a C-Head just like the Q-morpheme.

(89) a.
b.

[CP [∃i-C] [ … [ … [Indefinite Noun Phrase]i …]]]
[CP [∃i-C] [[CP(adjunct) if we invite [some philosopher]i] [Max will beoffended]]]Under this assumption, (86) is now represented as (89b).
In the next section, we will consider under what condition SS is permitted under theseassumptions.
813. 4. 4 Identity and Parallelism
In general, it is believed that elided sites in an elliptical construction must be recovered ina course of derivation for interpretation. In order to retrieve elided parts, one possibility isthat they must be strictly identical to their antecedent ones. Thus, the identity determines
recoverability, which licenses the applicability of deletion. This seems to be correct insome cases, but it is still controversial what the identity should be like. On one hand, it isclaimed that elided sites must be syntactically identical (Chomsky (1955, 1965), Fiengo andMay (1995), Fox (2000), Fox and Lasnik (2003), Williams (1977) among others). On theother hand, it is suggested that elided sites must be semantically identical, hence retrievable(Fox (2000), Merchant (2001) among others). In this section, I would like to propose that
deletion is determined by LF Structural Parallelism, according to which phonologicaldeletion is licensed only if the LF structure of a category that contains elided material isstructurally isomorphic to that of the antecedent category, particularly the operator-variable
dependencies of both structures in the cases of SS. I also claim that the parallelism isevaluated at a relevant phase CP within the phase-based theory. Besides, I suggest thatwhen deleting elements under this parallelism, as many elements presupposed or implied in
the antecedent structure must be deleted as possible except focused elements (Maximal
Effect of Deletion).
Before analyzing SS, I take a brief look at some analyses regarding parallelism. One of
the most straightforward cases of strict identity is found in VP deletion. The discussion on
this goes way back to Chomsky (1955).

(90) a.

I saw the play and so did he.

b.

I will see the play and so will he.

c.

I have seen the play and so has he.

d.

I have been seeing the play and so has he.

Each deleted VP site in the second conjunct is thought to be recoverable from the VP in theantecedent clause under the strict identity.
represented as (91).
82

For example, the structure of (90a) is(91) I [T(Past) [VP see the play] and so [T-did he [VP see the play]].14

Basically, the strict identity refers to exactly the same elements between two structures.
There are, however, some cases where the strict identity condition is too strong as we willsee below. How are they derived? Intuitively, in those cases, an antecedent would haveto produce an input as presupposition to an elided part. Fox (2000) and Merchant (2001)
provide very intriguing conditions on this. Their fundamental argument is that deletion orphonological reduction is licensed when the meaning of elided or down-stressed material is
implied in its corresponding antecedent parts, and the LF structure of the antecedent site is
structurally isomorphic to that of the following elided site.
In order to explain VP deletion (92a), for example, Merchant (2001) assumes that thetrace of the subject left in the v*P is a variable bound by an existential quantifier inserted at
v*P and claims that both LF structures must be identical to each other for the VP to be deleted.
This is roughly illustrated below.

(92) a. Abby sang because Ben did.

(Merchant (2001: 14))b. Antecedent v*P = (∃i) [v*P ti sang]c. Elided v*P = (∃j) [v*P tj sang]

In each structure, the existential quantifier binds the trace of the subject. Since the LF
structure of the v*Ps in (92b) is identical to that in (92c) modulo ∃-type shifting, the v*P in
the second clause can be deleted (See 3.3.2.4 for details).
We can also see that there is a certain identical dependency of LF structures for otherelliptic constructions. Fox (2000) presents some instances of VP deletion involving scopal
inversion, arguing that the LF structural parallelism should determine the possibility ofdeletion and semantics of scope in elliptical constructions. As shown below, Fox claims
that the LF structure which the antecedent clause has through entailment determines theapplication of deletion to the VP in the second conjunct and scopal relation. Consider (93).

(93) a.

Some boy admires every teacher, and Mary does, too. (∃ > ∀) *(∀ > ∃)83

b.

Mary admires every teacher, and some boy does, too. (∃ > ∀) (∀ > ∃)(Fox (2000: 91))

Take (93b) first.

If Mary admires every teacher, it logically follows through“accommodation” that for every teacher there should be at least one girl, namely Mary, who
admires the teacher. This is represented as (94a), where inverse scope itself is assumed to
be impossible under Scope Economy (Fox (2001)).15(94) a.

Mary λx every teacher λy [x admires y] ⇨every teacher λy (some girl λx (x admires y))b.

every teacher λy (some girl λx (x admires y)) is an appropriate antecedent forevery teacher λy (some boy λx (x admires y))(cf. Fox (2000: 92))

Since the inverse scope in the second conjunct is possible, the scopal ambiguity comes out
together with VP deletion in (93b) under the isomorphism.
However, the same reasoning cannot be applied to (93a). The inverse scope of the first
conjunct does not necessarily entail that there is a boy who admires every teacher as
indicated (95a).

(95) a.

every teacher λy (some boy λx (x admires y)) ⇏some boy λx every teacher λy (x admires y))b.

Due to the non-availability of the targeted implication after scopal inversion,
only the surface structure can be the antecedent for
Mary λx every teacher y (x admires y)(cf. Fox (2000: 93))

Note that the scope inversion of the second conjunct is not possible under Scope Economy.
In order for VP deletion in the second conjunct to be admitted, the scopal relation of the first
conjunct is limited to the surface structure. This means that the LF structures must be
identical to each other for deletion to be applied.
Another similar dependency in an elliptical construction is also observed in other contexts.
84See another instance of VP deletion (96).

(96) a.
b.

Mary wants to catch a fish.
Mary wants to catch a fish, and John does, too.

(Lasnik 2010: 231))16

In (96a), the sentence is ambiguous in that there is a certain fish that Mary wants to catch orthat Mary hopes her fishing is successful. If so, there could be logically four readings in(96b), but only two are available to (96b). (97) show the two possible structures of (96a)in terms of the indefinite noun phrase a fish and the intention verb want.

(97) a.

∃x [NPi want [PROi to catch xfish]]b.

[NPi want [∃x [PROi to catch xfish]]]In fact, if the first conjunct means one of the LF structures of (97), the second conjunct musthave the same LF structures. That is, each conjunct should share either of the LF structures
above when the VP in the second conjunct is deleted.
Considering the discussion above, it can be claimed that in ellipsis constructions, the LF
structure of a site to undergo ellipsis must be LF structurally parallel to the structure of its
antecedent, and that the LF structure of an antecedent can be obtained by the impliedmeaning that the antecedent provides through accommodation or entailment. Besides, it
is also possible to assume that the meaning of a preceding structure serves as presupposition
for its following structure to be deleted. This means that it is reasonable to assume that if
an elided clause involves elements that not presupposed in its antecedent, they must evadedeletion or be focused in some way. Non-presupposed parts are left intact even when somestructural identity exists. See an example of Gapping (98).

(98) a.
b.

John took Harry to the beach, and Bill Mike.
[John took Harry to the beach], and [Bill [took Mike to the beach]].

In (98), both Bill and Mike are semantically and phonologically outstanding in the second85conjunct because the other elements like took and to the movies in the elided conjunct havealready been mentioned in the corresponding antecedent clause, and thus they are
considered to be presupposed. Consequently, those elements are deleted and Gapping(98b) is derived. In fact, the second clause in (98a) can never be interpreted like (99a).

(99) a. *John took Harry to the movies, and Bill [recommended Mike the movies].
b. *John took Harry to the movies, and Bill took Mike the movies.

Moreover, the bold typed elements in the second conjunct in (99b), which have already been
mentioned in the antecedent clause are not phonologically focused, either. We thus assume
that deletion is only possible when the LF structure of the first conjunct is shared with theintended meaning (LF structure) of the second conjunct whether directly or indirectly
through accommodation or implication (Fox (2000), Merchant (2001)).
As discussed in the previous chapter, we can see this in other contexts.

Recall theinteresting examples presented by Fox (2000). Consider (100).

(100) a.

First, Bill called Mary an idiot. Then John(focus) insulted her.

b. *First, Bill insulted Mary. Then Bill(focus) called her an idiot.
(Fox (2000: 84))

Suppose that the italicized parts in (100) have undergone phonological reduction. The
grammaticality, however, depends on whether we can infer from the antecedent clause anappropriate implication for the ellipsis site. If the acceptability of deleted or reduced sites
depends on whether the meaning implied in the first conjunct is shared with the targetedmeaning of the second conjunct, our common intuitive inference only allows (93a) to beruled in.

Insulting does not necessarily mean calling somebody an idiot.

Thus, themismatch of the possible meaning rules (100b) out.
Based on the observation here, I suppose that a preceding structure serves aspresupposition for the following structure, which is marked as a [Presupposed] andundergoes deletion at a later stage of derivation, PF.
86

The structure marked the[Presupposed] can include other elements when they are the same as the elements in thepreceding structure in that they function like a kind of variable, but they are different in thatthey have different content and phonetic features. In this case, I also suppose that thoseelements are focused marked [F]. Given this, suppose that the following assumptions hold,which are two-folds.

(101) a.

LF Structural Parallelism
Phonological deletion is licensed only if the LF structure of a categorythat contains elided material is structurally isomorphic to that of theantecedent.

b.

Maximal Effect of Deletion
Delete elements marked as [Presupposed] except focus marked [F]elements.

(101b) is also motivated by the following fact observed in “Sprouting” constructions,where, unlike SS, an antecedent conjunct has no indefinite noun phrase corresponding to awh-phrase in the second clause. In Spouting, even when a preposition is predictable in acontext, it must occur phonologically in an elided clause, while it is optional in normal SS
contexts. Compare (102) and (103).

(102) a.

They are jealous, but it’s unclear *(of) who.

b.

Joe was murdered, but we don’t know *(by) who(m)?

c.

Last night he was very afraid, but he couldn’t tell us *(of) what.

(103) a.

They are jealous of someone, but it’s unclear (of) who.

b.

Joe was murdered by someone, but we don’t know (by) who.

c.

Last night he was very afraid of something, but he didn’t tell us (of) what.
(Lasnik (2010: 228) as originally presented in Chung (2005))

Suppose that in sprouting examples in (102), the TP in the antecedent clause is deleted after
the wh-phrase in the following conjunct. (102) shows that elements that are not included87

as a linguistic expression in the antecedent clause cannot be deleted as discussed by
Hankmer and Sag (1976), but they must be overtly realized as a sort of focus element. In
English wh-interrogatives, a preposition in a PP including a wh-phrase can be optionallypied-piped with the wh-phrase. As indicated in SS cases (103), when a preposition in a PP
dominating an infinite noun phrase corresponding to a wh-phrase in the second conjunct isovertly realized in the antecedent clause, it is optional whether it is a part of the remnants.
However, the preposition in the case of Sprouting (102) cannot be deleted because it is notpresent as a linguistic expression in the antecedent clause.

The preposition must be

salvaged from deletion even though it is predictable. Therefore, it is reasonable to assume(101).

3. 5 An Analysis
Based on the assumptions in the previous sections, consider how English SS is derived.
Take a straightforward case (104a), for example.

(104) a.
b.

John saw someone, but I don’t know who.
John saw someone, but I don’t know who [John saw].

Following Heim (1982) and CLM among others, suppose that since the indefinite nounphrase in the first conjunct in (104a) is considered to be indeterminate, it is bound by anexistential closure as illustrated in (105) (see the discussion in 3.4.3.2.).

(105) [CP ∃i-C [TP John saw someonei]

This guarantees that the antecedent clause provides the meaning that there is a person John
saw. The TP, thus, will serve as a presupposition.
Now, consider the second conjunct to which deletion is applied. In particular, let us
consider how a wh-phase in SS should be dealt with. The wh-phrase in the second clauseis base-generated as an indeterminate element in the same position as the indefinite nounphrase in the antecedent clause. A wh-phrase is basically assumed to be a “restricted free88variable,” it must be bound by a relevant operator, in this case, the Q-morpheme. Under
this assumption here, the structure of the second conjunct prior to deletion can be represented
as below.

(106) [CP Qi-C [TP John saw whoi]]17

Under my assumption, the English Q-morpheme requires a wh-phrase to be phonologicallyadjacent to it. Thus, the grammaticality depends on whether the wh-phrase moves to theadjacent position, the Spec-CP of the Q-morpheme or the Spec-TP. However, there isanother way available for the wh-phrase to be adjacent to the Q-morpheme. Alternatively,
deleting relevant sites would make the wh-phrase adjacent to the Q-morpheme. If the overt
operation “Move” was a composite operation consisting of “Copy, Move, and Merge,” andanother subsequent simple operation could offer the same output, the option based on nonmovement would be less economical and must be chosen as a possible derivation. Thus,
this option is more appealing unless other syntactic requirements such as the EPP feature
force movement.
As just mentioned, the antecedent conjunct John saw someone includes the indefinite
noun phrase someone functioning as a variable, and the clause serves as a presupposition
for the second clause. The embedded question in the second conjunct with the wh-phrasebase-generated in the same position as someone is based on the presupposed event in thefirst conjunct. Therefore, the first clause serves as a presupposition meaning that there wasa certain person that John saw, and the embedded question asks to whom the event is applied.
Taking this respect into consideration, let us see how the LF structure of the second clauseis represented.

Comparing (106) with (105), we can see that while the structures are

identical to each other in that they both include a variable and an operator in the same
position like [OP(x) [John saw x person]], they are different in that they have a different
kind of operator and a different variable with its phonological feature. Each variable isbound by its own relevant operator as indicated in (105) and (106). In this respect, I
assume that the second clause is marked as [Presupposed] due to the event denoted by the
first clause, and the Q-morpheme and the wh-phrase who in (106) are contrastively
89semantically F-marked [F]. This is represented as (107).

(107) [C-Qi[F] [John saw [whoi [F]]][Presupposed]

In the articulated LF structure (107), the relevant clause is marked as [Presupposed], and [F]is assigned to the Q-morpheme and the wh-phrase as focus elements.
Now see how deletion in (104a) is induced and how (104a) is derived under ourmechanism. An instance of strict identity as a license condition for deletion cannot beapplied because (107) includes different elements. Comparing the LF structures of the first
CP with that of the embedded CP in the second clause, we can find that they satisfy theparallelism in (101a). Next, applying the Maximal Effect of Deletion in (101b) to theembedded CP in the second clause, the presupposed elements are deleted with the focusmarked element uneased. See (108b).

(108) a.
b.

John saw someone, but I don’t know who.
The antecedent CP: [CP C-∃i [TP John saw someonei]]
The elided CP:

I don’t know [CP C-Qj[F] [TP John saw [whoj (F)]]][Presupposed]

As shown above, deleting the elements in the embedded CP (108b), which are presupposed
based on the LF of the antecedent CP, the wh-phrase becomes phonologically adjacent to
the Q-morpheme, and (104a) is eventually derived.
I am assuming that the Q-morpheme determines language variations and it requires atleast one wh-phrase to be phonologically adjacent to it in English. This assumption makes
it easy to explain derivations of SS. As mentioned above, if overt movement is a more
complex operation and another option to do the same effect is available, a less costly
operation should be preferred. Fortunately, even if the latter option is chosen and no overt
movement is induced like (108b), the final structure of the second CP obtained by deletion
makes the remnant wh-phrase phonologically adjacent to the morpheme, satisfying therequirement of the English Q-morpheme. Thanks to this derivation, the English SS of(104a) is straightforwardly derived without wh-movement.
90

The argument that a wh-phrase in SS stays in situ is supported by facts seen in the the hell
construction discussed by Pesetsky (1987) and Lasnik and Saito (1992). According tothem, it appears that the phrase the hell is not allowed to co-occur with a wh-phrase in situ.

(109)

What the hell did you do on my car?

(110) *Who read what the hell?

(Lasnik and Saito (1992: 173))

As a matter of fact, this construction is not possible in SS.

(111) a.

They were arguing about something, but I don’t know what.

b. *They were arguing about something, but I don’t know what the hell.
(Sprouse (2005: 1))(112) a.

John bought something, but I don’t know what.

b. *John bought something, but I don’t know what the hell.

The ungrammaticality of (111b) and (112b) indicates a possibility that a wh-phrase in SS
does not move, but the adjacency requirement is satisfied in the base position.18 Thus, thismeans that SS is derived not through violation repair by deletion as Ross (1969), Chomsky(1972), and Fox and Lasnik (2003) argue, but we can claim that the movement violatingisland conditions never takes place in the first place, but SS can be derived by deleting
presupposed elements with a wh-phrase in situ except some cases involving features suchas the EPP feature.
Next, let us see how my analysis here can explain more complicated SS involving islands.
Take (13), repeated as (113), for example, in which there is a relative clause involved in thesecond conjunct.

(113) a.

She kissed a man who bit one of my friends, but Tom doesn’t realize which
one of my friends.

b. *She kissed a man who bit one of my friends, but Tom doesn’t realize which
one of my friends she kissed a man who bit t.
91

In this case, too, since the indefinite noun phrase one of my friends in the first sentence has
an existential specific interpretation, it is bound over the clause by an existential closure asin (114a), which ensures that there should be a certain person of the speaker’s friends suchthat she kissed a man who bit her. Just like (106), the LF structure of the embedded CP in
the second sentence is represented with the Q-morpheme on the embedded CP binding thewh-phrase as in (114b).

(114) a.
b.

[CP ∃i-C [TP She kissed a man [CP C [who bit [one of my friends]i]]]][CP Q i-C [TP She kissed a man [CP C [who bit [which one of my friends]i]]]]The wh-phrase cannot undergo movement to the upper CP across the relative clause because
the intervening categories form phases that block the wh-movement to the position, resulting
in disobeying the phonological requirement of the English Q-morpheme. However, there
is another way for the wh-phrase to satisfy the requirement.

Deleting the intervening

categories at PF can salvage the wh-phrase from the violation of the requirement. Let us
see how this can be made possible.

The parallelism (101a) is satisfied because theoperator-binding dependencies of both structures in (114) are identical to each other as we
can see in (114). The meaning of the first sentence just mentioned above serves as apresupposed proposition for the embedded question in the second sentence. As a result,the LF of the embedded CP in the second sentence is represented as (115).

(115) [[Qi-C][F] [TP She [vP kissed a man [C [who bit [which one of my friends]i[F]]]]]][Presupposed]This structure undergoes the deletion operation at PF in accordance with Maximal Effect ofDeletion (101b). As a result, the Q-morpheme phonologically becomes adjacent to thewh-phrase without movement. In this way, SS like (113a) including an island in a deleted
structure is finally derived. It can be also claimed that if the analysis here is correct, thisline of reasoning is applied to other instances of SS such as (13)-(16).
Recall, as seen in the previous sections, that, under the PIC assumed in Chomsky (2001,
2005) and Chomsky et. al. (2017), the morpheme can reach a wh-phrase in a remote position92

across phrases even after the phase including the wh-phrase is transferred or spelled out.
Therefore, even in a framework which assumes that the Q-morpheme and a wh-phrase
would have an uninterpretable feature such as a Q-feature, the uninterpretable feature could
be valued. If the account I have proposed here for a derivation of SS is correct, a violationof an island condition in wh-movement in SS would be able to be avoided by deletion
beforehand.
Note that it seems that categories to be deleted in SS do not constitute a maximal
projection or constituent as seen in (115).

Traditionally, it has been assumed that amaximal projection is a possible target to be deleted (Lobeck 1995). Thus, one might
wonder whether non-constituent deletion is possible to assume.

Investigating someexamples with deletion, we can find that non-constituent deletion is admitted. Consider(116).

(116) What hope could there be of finding any supervisors?

(Radford (2009: 160))

Under the copy theory, after wh-movement has been induced, the derived structure of (116)will be like (117a), where the wh-phrase forms a maximal projection wh-P as (117b).

(117) a.

What hope of finding any supervisors could there be what hope of finding
any supervisors?

b.

(Radford (2009: 159))[wh-P What [NP hope [PP of finding any supervisors]]](117a) is derived by deleting some parts in each maximal phrase (117b). This is illustratedin (118).

(118) [wh-P What [hope [of finding any supervisors]]] could there be [wh-P What [NP hope
[PP of finding any supervisors]]](Radford (2009: 160))

In (118), the maximal projection PP is deleted in the left most wh-P, but in the second wh-P,
what and hope which can form a phonological constituent, but does not form a maximal
93

projection are deleted. (118) shows that sites undergoing the deletion operation do nothave to be a maximal projection, but deletion of non-constituent material could be permitted.
We can find another instance of non-constituent deletion in another ellipsis phenomenon“Pseudogapping,” which I will discuss in the later chapter.

The elided sites in thisconstruction seem neither to form a constituent nor even a continuous structure.

The

examples below are from Lasnik (1995).

(119) a.

The DA proved Jones guilty and the Assistant DA prove Smith guilty.

b. ? John gave Bill a lot of money, and Mary will give Susan a lot of money.

In (119), the matrix verb and other elements do not form a constituent, but they have been
deleted selectively. Thus, applying a deletion operation to a non-constituent is possible,
and it can be concluded that the partial deletion that I have adopted for SS is not soinadequate.

3. 6 Remaining Issues
In this section, extending the present account for regular SSs to other constructions, I will
illustrate how they can be explained.

3. 6. 1 Swiping
Let us take a look at another type of sluicing called, “Swiping,” where a complement whphrase in a PP occurs inverted with its governing preposition in a SS context.19 Some
examples are given in (120).

(120) a.

Lois was talking (to someone), but I don’t know who to.
(Merchant (2001: 65))b.

She bought a robe, but God knows who for.

c.

He was shouting to someone, but it was impossible to tell who to.

d.

A: She’s going to leave her fortune to someone.
B:Really? Who to?

(b - d: Merchant (2001: 123))94

In (12), a wh-phrase appears to be moved with a preposition left in the original position.
This construction has been one of the main topics regarding SS since Merchant (2001)
pointed out the peculiarities in this construction. Although some properties have been
examined in the literature (Hasegawa (2007) and Larson (2012)), its mechanism is still
unclear. Ross (1969) and Merchant (2001, 2002) pointed out that this type of inversion
within PP is optional and only permitted in sluicing such (120), and it is not possible in theabsence of sluicing such as (121).

(121) a. *I don’t know [who to] Lois was talking.
b. *[Who to] was Lois talking?

(Merchant (2001: 65))(122) a. *I know Mary was working, but I can’t remember [who with] she wasworking.
b. *[Where to] are you moving?

(Tyler (2017: 291))

How is Swiping in SS derived in my analysis proposed here? Let us take (120a), forexample. As discussed, I have claimed that a wh-phrase does not have to be moved to a
CP as long as it can satisfy the phonological requirement. According to Sprouse (2005),
both a preposition and a wh-phrase in Swiping are phonologically focused. Following
Bošković (2014) among others, suppose that the preposition in a PP could serve as a phasehead. Then, an edge of the P-Head would offer a possible landing site for wh-movement.
If the wh-phrase can move to the edge-position of a P-Head, the second conjunct will be(123).

(123) I don’t know [CP [Qi-C][F] [TP Lois was talking [PP whoi[F] [to[F] whoi ]]]]
[Presupposed]

If the inversion of a wh-phrase and a preposition is optional only in SS, it can be induced at
PF for some prosodic reasons. The inversion at PF makes the adjacency requirement
satisfied, and the parallelism is also satisfied because the original copy of the wh-phrase
exists in the parallel position of the corresponding indefinite noun phrase in the antecedent.
This derives Swiping in Swiping (120).
95

How about examples like (124)?

(124) Lois was talking to someone, but I don’t know to who.

In (124), the preposition to appears to block the phonological requirement of the Qmorpheme. However, I suggest that the preposition is phonologically focused and it canfunction as an amalgamated element with its complement wh-phrase. Following Selkirk(1982), I assume that the properties of the complement wh-phrase within the PP can bepercolated up to the PP, and the PP itself would function as a wh-phrase with the focus whproperties.

Specifically, suppose that the phonological property of the wh-phrase ispercolated from its base-generated position at PF before the final linear order is determined.
The phonological requirement of the Q-morpheme is satisfied by the PF percolation of thephonological property of the wh-phrase, and the sentence becomes grammatical under theparallelism as shown in (125).

(125) a.
b.

[∃i-C [Lois was talking to someonei]]
I don’t know [CP [Qi-C][F] [TP Lois was talking [to who]i[F] ]].
[Presupposed]

Next, how is the ungrammaticality of (121), where the inversion like (120) is prohibited,
explained? Let us consider (120a), for example. If the PP including the wh-phrase is
moved from the complement position of the verb to the CP by wh-movement, the relevant
structure will be like (126b). After wh-movement, the optional phonological inversion isapplied to the wh-phrase who, which moves to the Spec-PP as illustrated in (126c).

(126) a.

[CP [Qi-C][F] [TP Lois was talking [PP to[F] who[F] ]]]b.

[CP [PP to[F] who[F]]i[Qi-C][F] [TP Lois was talking ti ]c.

[CP [PP who[F] [to[F] who]]i [Qi-C][F] [TP Lois was talking ti ]In this case, the wh-phrase and the preposition cannot be a phonologically amalgamatedelement.

The phonologically focused preposition blocks the adjacency requirement96between of the Q-morpheme because the percolation of the phonological properties of thewh-phrase from the specifier position is blocked. Therefore, wh-interrogatives with thewh-phrase-preposition inversion like (121) and (122) are ruled out.

3. 6. 2 The Ungrammaticality of VP Deletion with SS
Next, let us consider the problem regarding the ungrammaticality of SS including VP
deletion, which remains to be explained. Take (32c) and (36b), reproduced as in (127a)and (127b), respectively.

(127) a. *They want to hire someone who speaks a Balkan language, but I don’t
remember which (Balkan language) they do.
b. *They said they heard about a Balkan language, but I don’t know which(Balkan language) they did.

Notice that (127a) has a relative clause in the deleted structure while (127b) does not. In
both cases, the subject and the auxiliary are undeleted with the wh-phrase.
There would be two possible ways to derive (127). As one possible derivation, supposethat the wh-phrase in (127) could move up to the embedded CP in order to satisfy theadjacency requirement even though the wh-movement in the case of (127a) violates the PIC
somehow. After the movement, the conjuncts of (127a), for example, would have the LF
structures as in (128).

(128) a.

[CP [which (Balkan language)[F]]i [Qi-C [TP they do [want tohire someone who speaks [which (Balkan language)]i]]][Presupposed]b.

[CP ∃i-C [TP They want to hire someone who speaks [a Balkan language]i]]If the copy of the wh-phrase still is in the base-generated position, namely, the θ position,
the Parallelism (101a), which requires the operator-variable dependency of the two
conjuncts to be identical to each other, is satisfied. However, Maximal Effect of Deletion97

(101b) is not observed in this case. When deletion is applied to the embedded clause in
the second conjunct, as many overlapped as possible elements should be elided with thefocus elements intact. That is, the subject and the auxiliary must be deleted along withother presupposed elements. This accounts for the ungrammaticality of (127b). With
respect to (127a), there is no way for the wh-phrase to move to the CP, violating the PIC,
where it can satisfy the adjacency requirement of Q-morpheme. Thus, this option is alsodifficult to accept.
As the other option, suppose that under the PIC, the wh-phrase cannot move to the SpecCP in (127a) while it can in (127b). However, in both cases, the Q-morpheme allows thewh-phrase to stay in situ to avoid the complex operation Move (Copy, Move, and Merge).
Because the deletion operation is applied to as many overlapped structures as possible withthe focus marked sites intact, the subject they and the auxiliary do must be deleted together
with other elements as represented in (129). As a result, the examples in (127a) will not
be derived.

(129)[CP Qi-C[F] [TP they do [want to hire someone who speaks [which (Balkan
language)]i[F]]]][Presupposed]

The same analysis can be applied to (127b), too. See (130).

(130)

I don’t know [CP Qi-C[F] [TP they did [say they heard about [which (Balkan
language)]i[F]]]].

[Presupposed]

Just like (129), the Maximal Effect of Deletion requires the subject they and the auxiliary
did to be elided with the other elements in the [Presupposed]-marked structure except [F]marked elements. Therefore, (130) is not derived.
Note that the wh-phrase in (127b) would be moved to the Spec-CP without violating any
condition on movement.

98

(131) I don’t know [CP [which (Balkan language)]i[F]]Qi-C[F] [TP they did [say they
heard about t ]]However, just like (130), the subject and auxiliary should be deleted for the Maximal Effectof Deletion as (131). Therefore, as seen above, the unacceptability of SS with VP deletionis explained easily under my assumption.

3. 6. 3 Contrast Type
Finally, I will expound upon another complicated example like (132), where, unlike(127b), VP deletion is possible even in a SS context when an auxiliary is phonologicallyfocused.

(132) I don’t know which puppy you SHOULD adopt, but I know which one
you SHOULDN’T.

In (132), the wh-phrase moves to the CP position in both conjuncts, but VP deletion ispermitted unlike (127).

A closer examination under the proposal here should help to

explain this phenomenon.

In (133), the auxiliary is phonologically focused with

contrastive stress. Under the system here, the structure of each embedded clause will be
represented as in (133).

(133) [CP [which puppy[F]]i [Qi-C [TP you [T-SHOULD[F] [adopt ti]]]][CP [which one[F]]j [Qi-C [TP you [T-SHOULDN’T[F] [adopt tj]]]][Presupposed]

Notice that these structures are identical to each other because the dependency between the
Q-morpheme and variables, and the position of focused auxiliary are exactly the same.
With this isomorphism, we can expect the presupposed elements including the subject to bedeleted along with the verb except the focus-marked elements. Then, why can the subject
you evade deletion and exist as one of the remnants? The raison d’être of the overlapped
subject is attributed to the universal property that the T-Head has, namely, the Extended99

Projection Principle (EPP) feature which needs a phonologically realized DP or an elementwith a D-feature in its specifier position. Unlike the cases in (127), the auxiliaries in (133)are phonologically emphasized to indicate the contrastive stress. If the auxiliary is locatedin the T-Head, the EPP feature of the T-Head will require a subject DP to be present in thespecifier position like (134).

(134) [[which puppy[F]]j [Qj-C [TP youx SHOULDN’T[F][EPP] [ tx adopt tj]]]]Thus, as (134) shows, even though the subject you is overlapped without focus-mark, thestrong requirement of the EPP feature on the focus-marked T-Head does not allow thesubject to be deleted. The elided VP site is the same as the VP in the first conjunct in that
their structures are both [vP t(subj) adopt [wh-phrase]]. Therefore, the parallelism condition
is obeyed. As a result, VP deletion in SS can be derived appropriately.

3. 7 Conclusion
In this chapter, I have discussed derivations of SS and explored an alternative analysis of
SS in a more reasonable way. I have claimed that the previous analyses are all intriguing
and interesting, but there are some empirical and theoretical problems with them. I pointed
out that it is still unclear how a wh-phrase in SS can move across islands under the PIC tocreate a phonological constituent to undergo a deletion operation. However, by extending
Baker’s Q-morpheme, I have suggested that the English Q-morpheme can bind as an
operator a wh-phrase in a remote position. Although the English Q-morpheme should bephonologically adjacent to a wh-phrase, the adjacency will become possible by a deletion
operation. Since SS is only possible when the corresponding antecedent clause involves
an indefinite noun phrase, which is considered to be indeterminate, I have assumed,
following Heim (1982), that an indefinite noun phrase is bound by an existential quantifier
like the Q-morpheme.

Furthermore, I have suggested that the LF isomorphism(Parallelism), which requires the elided site to be structurally isomorphic to thecorresponding site in the antecedent clause.

Building on these assumptions, I haveproposed the Maximal Effect of Deletion, which deletes as much as possible except focus
100marked material. With these assumptions, I have proposed an alternative analysis of a
derivation of mysterious SS, claiming that a wh-phrase bound by the Q-morpheme in SS
stays in situ except some cases involving some syntactic requirement such as an EPP feature,and the overlapped elements are deleted by Maximal Effect of Deletion. This analysis
overcomes some problems with wh-movement in SS and indicates that there is a possibility
that deletion can be applied to a non-constituent or non-maximal projection. In this point,
my analysis has provided a new perspective to analyses of elliptical phenomena.

Notes for Chapter 3* This chapter is a revised and extended version of the papers that appeared in “A Minimalist
Analysis of Sluicing” (Hirai (2007)), “A Minimalist Approach to Sluicing” (Hirai (2009)),“Sakujyo Gensyou wo Megutte -Sluicing wo Chuushin-ni (On Phenomenon of Deletion With Special Reference to Sluicing - )” (Hirai (2014)), and “‘MaxElide’ nikansuru
Ikutsukano Oboegaki (Some Notes on ‘MaxElide’) (Hirai (2016)).

1. See Ross (1969: 252-254) for details.
2. For explanatory purposes here, suppose that the subjacency condition prevents a whphrase from moving across two TP or DP at the same time.

For more details of thiscondition, see Chomsky (1973) and his subsequent works.
3. Since, under the minimalist framework, a Case feature of a DP can be valued in a probegoal relation, the Case feature of the DP in (24a) and (24d) can be valued by the T-Headwithin the AGREE relation. If so, the problem here would be attributed to the failure oferasing the [EPP] feature of the T-Head. However, if a Case feature was valued at LF, wewould need some other assumptions to explain an example like (i), where the wh-phrase has
been moved overtly to the leftmost position, and its trace (copy) has to be Case-valued at
LF. Therefore, the assumption that a Case feature is valued at LF is not so convincing.
(i)What did you buy t?

4. Theoretically, the LF Recycling operation may violate no-tampering condition which
prevents inner sites in a constructed structure from being changed. Some version of latemerge is suggested by Lebeaux (1988). He argues that adjoining some structure at a later101

stage is necessary to explain the fact of (i).
(i)

[Which [ picture [of Bill]] [ADJ that John liked]]i did he buy ti ?

In (i), the relation between Bill and he is impossible because of Condition C in Binding
Theory, while the relation between John and he is not. Lebeaux claims that assuming thatthe adjunct, that John liked is merged later after “spell-out” obviates the violation ofCondition C. This idea, however, never fits well in the cyclic derivation, either.
5. Merchant shows that similar facts related to Case-valuing in the context of SS are
observed in Greek.
(i) a.

Kapjosirthe, alla dhe ksero(pjos /

*pjon).

someone came, but not know-1SG who-NOM / *who-ACC‘Someone came, but I don’t know who.’b.

Dhe ksero
not(*i apantisi / tin apantisi).

know-1SG the answer-NOM / the answer-ACC‘I don’t know the answer.’(Merchant (2001: 43))

As seen in (ib), the object of know in Greek is realized as Accusative Case. If Accusative
Case is valued by know, Accusative Case should also be available to the object in the second
conjunct in (ia). However, only Nominative Case is possible in the context. This showsthat a Case assigner must have existed and the salvaged wh-element have been extracted outof the elided structure. Like English cases, however, the LF copying approach cannot
possibly explain this empirical evidence.
6. As Lasnik (2010) claims, whether the category of the elided clause is CP or DP may not
be so crucial to the LF Copying/Recycling approach. However, the WYSIWG analysis
cannot explain the facts of SS. It must also be clarified what motivates a wh-phrase to belocated directly in a Spec-CP position.
7. There are various ways of illustrating dependencies. Since the operator-variable relationis represented by the dependency involving the operator over choice function, thedependencies can also be shown like (i).
(i) a.
b.

∃f choice function [Fred said that I talked to f(girl)]but I don’t know which g choice function [Fred said that I talked to g(girl)]

In the antecedent clause, the existential operator over choice function can derive (ia), and it102

is presupposed that there was a specific girl such that Fred said that the speaker I talked toher. Given the Copy theory of wh-movement, the representation of the sluiced clause is
like (ib), where the wh-attached noun phrase is deleted at the head in a chain and interpreted
at the tail as in (37). In this case, too, the element in the tail is a variable ranging overindividuals and it is questioned which girl is the one that Fred said that I talked to. This
representation can also satisfy the parallelism.
8. Hirai (2016) explores the advantages and disadvantages of Merchant (2008) and Hartman(2011), and points out that the basic idea of their analyses is promising, but they both involvesome theoretical problems at the same time, particularly, Inclusiveness Condition. For
discussion, see Hirai (2016).
9. Merchant uses IP instead of TP. I assume that they refer to the same projection, and I
uses TP for explanatory purposes.
10. More specifically, the trace left by wh-movement is the <e> type in terms of semantic
types, which does not have a referential semantic value.

Therefore, it is shifted to avariable to be bound by existential closure.
11. Moreover, some cases of VP Deletion with a category which is assumed to involve a PF
island effect, are not improved, either.
(i) a.

It appears that a certain senator will resign, but which senator [it appears thatt will resign] is still a secret.

b. *It appears that a certain senator will resign, but which senator it does [appear
that t will resign] is still a secret.
(ii) a. Sally asked if somebody was going to fail Syntax One, but I can’t remember
who [Sally asked if t was going to fail Syntax One].
b. *Sally asked if somebody was going to fail Syntax One, but I can’t remember
who Sally did [asked if t was going to fail Syntax One].
These facts indicate that Merchant’s attempt to eliminate islands by reducing is not adequate.
For more examples, see CML and Lasnik (2001).
12. Hartman (2011) attempts to provide a unified account including an A´-trace and A-traceand explain the problems in discussion. His analysis is the same as Merchant in that theyboth assume that parallelism is based on semantic identity, but it is different in that Hartman103

uses the parallelism based on structural rebinding byλ-abstraction suggested by Takahashi
and Fox (2005). However, the mechanism of rebinding remains to be clarified. See Hirai(2016) for discussion and problems with his analysis.
13. The basic idea proposed here is based on Chomsky (1995), Agbayani (2006), Kimura(2010), Abe and Hornstein (2012) and Abe (2015).

According to Abe, for example,

movement operation is two-hold: Move-F and Pied-Piping. A feature of a moved category
is first moved to a relevant probing head and the remnant is moved afterwards only in thecase it outputs a new result. This can derive so-called vacuous movement. However,under the system of the probe-goal system, it is still unclear what motivates two movements
proposed in his analyses.
14. Chomsky suggests that auxiliaries must also be identical as shown below.
(i) *I will see the play and so did he.
According to Chomsky, this comes from differences in ordering of Affix Hopping rules.
Depending on auxiliaries, the order of applying Affix Hopping and Deletion varies.
However, as a required condition, strict identity holds for this example.
15. Fox (2000) assumes that all quantifiers are raised to a clause-denoting position. For(94), they are raised to as high as VP or TP.
16. I would like to thank Howard Lasnik and Gesoel Mendes, for presenting me theexamples.
17. If an antecedent sentence serves as a presupposed proposition, one may ask if SS
includes a cleft sentence as (i) or a “pseudo-cleft sentence as (ii).
(i) Somebody just left. Guess who (it was t that just left).
(ii) Somebody just left. Guess who it was.
However, there are a number of empirical facts that demonstrate that deleted parts in SS
involve the structure of the antecedent.

Merchant (2001) presents as many as ten

phenomena that show an underlying structure of SS does not include a cleft sentence.
Therefore, I assume that a structure to undergo deletion in SS is exactly the same structureof the corresponding antecedent. (See also Erteschik (1973))
18. Sprouse (2005) proposes that the wh-phrase with the hell is ruled out in terms of thephonological principle, called “the Accented Projection Principle”. For further discussion,104

see Merchant (2001, 2002) and Sprouse (2005)
19. According to Merchant (2001), “Swiping” is tagged after “Sluicing With In-Situ
Preposition In Northern Germanic,” and it is reported that this construction is observed
mainly in Danish, some varieties of Norwegian, Dutch, German, English, and Swedish.
See also Sprouse (2005: fn 1).

105

Chapter 4
On Multiple Sluicing*

4. 1 Introduction

This chapter explores a more plausible analysis of another intriguing instance of theelliptical phenomena, called “multiple sluicing” (henceforth MS) in English as (1).

(1) I know that in each instance one of the girls got something from one of theboys. But they didn't tell me which from which.
(Lasnik (2014: 5); cf. Bolinger (1978: 109))

Since the example (1) is consistently interpreted as (2), it seems that some elements in theembedded clause in the second sentence have been deleted with multiple wh-phrases left
intact.

(2) I know that in each instance one of the girls got something from one of theboys. But they didn't tell me which got something from which.

The example (1) is similar to single sluicing (SS) like (3a) discussed in the previous chapter
in that elements in the embedded question seem to have been deleted with wh-phrases
undeleted.

106

(3) a.

Ralph is going to invite somebody from Kankakee to the party, but they don’tknow who.

b.

Ralph is going to invite somebody from Kankakee to the party, but they don’tknow who he’s going to invite to the party.

(Ross (1969: 252))

Assuming that the PF Deletion approach is basically on the right track, I have claimed that
SS like (3a) is derived by deleting the TP without wh-movement. Thus, I expect that we
can apply the same analysis to MS and claim that MS is derived by deleting elements in theembedded question of the second sentence without moving two wh-phrases.
It is important to consider a derivation of MS, because MS like (1) is also interesting andmysterious in its derivation. Like SS, there are also some syntactic differences between
regular multiple wh-questions and MS. For example, it is widely known that in English,
only one wh-phrase is allowed to be moved to a Spec-CP, and thus multiple wh-fronting isnever possible as below unlike other languages such as Bulgarian.1(4) a.

Whoi ti bought what?

b. *Whoi whatj ti bought tj?
c. *Whatj whoi did ti buy tj?
d.

Whoi did John ask ti to buy what?

e. *Whoi Whatj did John ask ti to buy tj?
f. *Whatj Whoi did John ask ti to buy tj?

The examples in (4) show that only one wh-phrase can be fronted even in a multiple whquestion with the other wh-phrases located in their base-generated positions. Therefore, it
is impossible to suppose that two wh-phrases in the embedded clause in MS are fronted tothe embedded Spec-CP to create a pre-elliptical structure like the second sentence as below.

107

(5)

I know that in each instance one of the girls got something from one of the boys.
*But they didn't tell me which from which got something.

(Lasnik (2014: 5))

Just like (4b), (4c), (4e), and (4f), the second sentence in (5) can never be derived.
Strangely enough, however, if certain elements are deleted as (1), the sentence will become
dramatically grammatical.

This indicates that MS is another theoretically and empiricallyinteresting phenomenon, and thus its derivation must be explored. If a sentence like (5) isnever possible to derive, it is necessary to ask how the surface form of MS (1) can beobtained.

That is, as has been conventionally assumed by Lobeck (1995) and othergenerative linguists, if a deletion operation was applied to a maximal projection, namely aphonological constituent, it would be hard to explain how MS in (1) would be derived in
English without multiple wh-fronting. Given the facts in (4) and (5), it is unclear how thephonological constituent itself can be constructed in the syntactic component before thedeletion operation is applied.2
Furthermore, there is another fact observed in MS. While island conditions are ignored
in SS, MS is subject to so-called a “clause-mate condition.” See (6).

(6) A certain boy said that Fred talked to a certain girl. *I wish I could remember which
boy to what girl.

(Lasnik (2014: 12))(6) indicates that the second wh-phrase is only limited within a minimal clause and cannot
be related to an element outside the embedded clause. That is, MS must obey a clausemate condition (Takahashi (1994), Nishigauchi (1998, 1999), Fox and Pesetsky (in prep.)).
Thus, the task here is to clarify what the derivation of MS comes from.
Although instances of MS do not occur very often, it is very attractive, and thus important
to consider how they are derived in the theory of syntax to cast additional light on the humanlanguage faculty. In this chapter, I would like to address phenomena of MS and provide108an alternative account of how MS is derived within the phase-based theory advocated by
Chomsky (2000), where derivations are assumed to proceed phase by phase.

More

specifically, I claim that wh-phrases in MS do not undergo wh-movement except somesituations where certain syntactic requirements force movement of wh-phrases, but they arebound by Baker’s (1970) Abstract Question Morpheme (Q-morpheme) as an operator.
Furthermore, I suggest that the second wh-phrase behaves like a strong quantifier sensitive
to clause-mate conditions. I also argue that MS is subject to LF parallelism as an identity
condition for deletion, in which the operator-variable relation in both the antecedent and theelided clause must be structurally isomorphic at LF just like other elliptical structures such
as SS. In addition, I propose that the LF parallelism is evaluated at a CP, one of the phases,
and as long as the parallelism is satisfied, deletion can apply maximally to elements
presupposed in an antecedent (Maximal Effect of Deletion). This will lead to showing that
MS is the same as other elliptical phenomena in that it obeys the LF structural isomorphism
and that contrary to the conventional assumption that deletion is applied to a maximal
projection, if inner elements in a parallel structure are presupposed in the antecedent, they
are deleted with focus elements like an operator and its variable intact.
This chapter is organized as follows: In the next section, I will review previous analyses
by Richards (2001) and Lasnik (2014), and point out some problems that arise with them.
In section 3, extending Baker’s proposal like the account of SS, I will provide an alternative
analysis and give some consequences to support my analysis by examining some otherphenomena. Section 4 will discuss more complex facts in MS. In section 5, I conclude
this chapter.

4. 2 Previous Analyses
English is one of the non-multiple wh-fronting languages. Thus, English MS has drawn
a lot of attention with respect to its derivation, and there have been some analyses presented
so far within the generative grammar; to name a few, Bolinger (1978), Nishigauchi (1998),
109

Richards (2001), Fox and Pesetsky (in prep.), Lasnik (2014), and Takahashi (1994).
Finding a lot of empirical phenomena, they attempt to provide various proposals on how
MS is derived within the framework of the generative grammar.

However, with thedevelopment of the theory, there have been some problems found with the previous analyses.
As some of the recent outstanding studies, I will review Richards (2001) and Lasnik (2014),
which both address MS within the minimalist framework I assume here.3 I will begin withthe analysis by Richards (2001) in the following section.

4. 2. 1 Richards (2001)
4. 2. 1. 1 Deletion and PF Ambiguity
In order to solve issues on the derivation of MS, Richards (2001) assumes the principles
given in (7) and claims that (7) can determine which element should be pronounced in afeature-driven chain. Besides, Richards suggests that violation of the principles in a courseof derivation can be repaired by a deletion operation, arguing that MS is derived
straightforwardly by deleting an illegitimate or unidentified element that is not correctlyinterpreted at the PF interface.

(7) a. PF must receive unambiguous instructions about which part of a chain topronounce.
b. A strong feature instructs PF to pronounce the copy in a chain with which it
is in a feature-checking relation.

(Richards (2001: 105))

As has been long assumed in the literature, syntactic objects moved in the syntactic
component need to be phonologically realized by phonological rules. Specifically, under
the Copy Theory of movement in which a moved element leaves its copy in the original orintermediate positions, there must be phonological rules at the PF interface which should
decide which wh-phrase must be phonologically realized in wh-movement like (8).
110

Otherwise, which copy should be pronounced or realized on the surface will be ambiguous.

(8) Whati did you buy whati yesterday?

In order to avoid the ambiguity, the PF should be able to interpret or see which element in achain must be pronounced. Then, Richards proposes the principles in (7) and claims that
the PF interface will receive appropriate instructions, based on an attracting strong feature,and it is instructed to pronounce an element moved by a strong feature in the chain of
movement. According to the principles, a wh-phrase in a normal English wh-interrogative,
which has been moved by a strong feature on the C-head, will be correctly pronounced in
the sentence in its initial position as shown in (9). Note that the inner detailed structures
are ignored for an explanatory purpose here.

(9) [What [C (strong) [did you buy what yesterday]]]?

Richards also assumes that there is a head which has a weak feature that attracts overtly
another element, and suggests that a C-head can have both strong and weak features at thesame time.

This can move multiple wh-phrases overtly, but it can explain

straightforwardly the ungrammaticality of multiple wh-fronting in English. One example
is given in (10).

(10) *Who what bought?

The ungrammaticality of (10) can be explained thusly: Suppose that the C-head has bothstrong and weak features, as illustrated in (11a). After the attraction of the first wh-phraseby the strong feature as in (11b), the weak feature on the C-head also moves overtly thesecond wh-phrase as given in (11c).4 However, the sentence becomes ungrammatical. If
111the second wh-phrase is moved overtly by the weak feature after the wh-movement by thestrong feature, an ambiguity arises under the principles in (7).

(11) a.

[C (strong, weak) [who bought what]]b.

[Whoi [C (strong, weak) [whoi bought whatj]]]c.

[Whoi [whatj [C (strong, weak) [whoi bought whatj]]]]d. *[Whoi [whatj [C [whoi bought whatj ]]]?

In (11), the PF interface cannot determine which copy of the second wh-phrase should be
pronounced. Consequently, Richard’s analysis correctly rules out the multiple wh-fronting
due to (7).
Richards claims that this analysis can be extended to an analysis of MS. Let us take thefollowing examples.

(12) a.

I know somebody talked to somebody, but I don’t remember who to
whom.

b.

*I know somebody talked to somebody, but I don’t remember who towhom talked.

Again, (12a) is interpreted as (12b). Suppose that like (11), the C-head of the embedded
clause has two wh-features: a strong and a weak wh-feature. The strong feature attracts thefirst wh-phrase to the Spec-CP in the embedded clause as indicated in (13a) while the second
wh-phrase (to whom in (13)) is overtly fronted by the weak feature of the same head just as
the multiple wh-fronting we have seen above. This is illustrated in (13b).

(13) a.

I know somebody talked to somebody, but I can’t remember[who [C (strong, weak) [who [talked to whom]]]].
112

b. *I know somebody talked to somebody, but I can’t remember[who [to whom] [C (strong, weak) who [talked to whom]]].

If the structure in (13b) is spelled out as it is, the sentence will be as ungrammatical as (10).
In this case, the PF interface cannot decide which wh-phrase in the second movement should
be pronounced, because the attraction by the weak feature is involved. As the next step, if
the TP structure below the CP undergoes a deletion operation as in (14), the trace (copy) of
the second wh-phrase will be deleted along with the other elements.

(14) I know somebody talked to somebody, but I can’t remember [CP who [ to whom
[C [TP who talked to whom]]]]This operation allows the PF interface to easily find the element to pronounce because there
is no candidate to pronounce under (7). As a result, MS can be derived eventually without
any violation.
As seen above, if Richards’ explanation is correct, it can be concluded that MS is also oneof the phenomena that can be derived through a kind of violation repair.

In the next

subsection, I argue that this violation repair does not necessarily fix the problem ofambiguity in PF realization.

4. 2. 1. 2 PF Violation is not Salvaged.
In this subsection, I assert that there are some empirical and theoretical problems with
Richards’ analysis.

First, let us take a look at some empirical problems.

If thegrammaticality of MS depends on the erasure of the PF ambiguity created by the copy of awh-phrase moved by the weak feature, it should be explained why the examples in (15)remain to be ungrammatical, where all the copies of the second wh-phrase with which tool
seem to have been deleted.
113

(15) A:The students talked about one of the topics in the given list with one of
the recommended tools: Power Point, handout, slides, or OHP.

B1: *Do you remember [which topic]i [with which tool]j they did [talked
about ti tj ]?
B2: *Do you remember [with which tool]j [which topic]i they did [talked
about ti tj ]In (15), two wh-phrases are fronted to the Spec-CP, and the second wh-phrase has been
moved overtly by the weak feature on the embedded C-head. However, even if the copiesof the second wh-phrase left in the base-generated position and a possible intermediate
landing site such as the embedded v*P are all deleted by VP Deletion, the grammaticality is
not improved. In fact, contrary to the expectation, B1 and B2 in (15) are unacceptable justlike SS with VP deletion as in (16b).

(16) a.

They said they heard about a Balkan language, but I don’t know which
Balkan language (they said they heard about).

b.

*They said they heard about a Balkan language, but I don’t know which
Balkan language they did.

Under Richards’ analysis, since the phonological ambiguity never occurs in (16b), (16b)should be judged as grammatical. However, this is not the case.
Second, looking more closely into his analysis in terms of the minimalist program, namely,
the Strong Minimalist Thesis, some theoretical problems will arise.

It is necessary to

examine whether assuming the strong/weak distinction on features is plausible or not. Of
course, it is ideal to dispense with such feature distinctions in the syntactic theory we havebeen pursuing.

In fact, Chomsky (1998: 127) mentions that “optimal design should

eliminate such strange and difficult properties as strength.” Therefore, under the Strong114

Minimalist Thesis, it is not desirable to assume the strong/weak feature distinction in asyntactic movement which Richards’ analysis mainly depends on. This means that weneed a different approach in order to provide a more reasonable analysis of MS. In thefollowing subsection, I will highlight another interesting analysis by Lasnik (2014).

4.2.2 Lasnik (2014)
4. 2. 2. 1 Rightward Movement of the Second Wh-phrase
Lasnik (2014), examining closely facts observed in MS, provides another interesting
analysis of MS. He argues that the second wh-phrase undergoes rightward movement to ahigher position than the deleted constituent, and then MS is derived by deleting the innerprojection. His argument comes from some facts observed in MS. One of the facts is
related to the properties of the second wh-phrase. As we see below, in MS, the second whphrase as a preposition phrase (PP) would be preferable to that as a determiner phrase (DP).
Compare (17a) with (17b).

(17) a. ?Someone talked about something, but I can’t remember who about what.
b. ?*Someone saw something, but I can’t remember who what.
(Lasnik (2014: 8))

The grammaticality of MS with the second wh-phrase as a PP like (17a) is considered to be
somewhat better than that with the second wh-phrase as a DP like (17b). Interestingly, thisfact is similar to other constructions where rightward movement is assumed to be involved.
Unlike DPs, PPs can be a focus element undergoing rightward movement even when it isinformationally light or literally short. Compare (18) with (19).

(18) a. *Mary saw yesterday Harry.
b.

Mary saw yesterday her old friend Mary.
115

c.

Mary saw yesterday Harry Hetherington.

(19) Mary spoke yesterday to him.

(Lasnik (2014: 9))(Lasnik (2014: 9))

In (18b) and (18c), the object DP is moved rightward over the adverbial phrase by Heavy
DP Shift (HDPS), but HDPS of the object is not admitted when the DP is comparatively
light like (18a). On the other hand, the PP to him in (19), which is as light as the object in(18a), can be extraposed rightward to the end position, but the sentence will not be degraded.
Based on this observation, Lasnik claims that while the first wh-phrase moves leftward to
the Spec-CP, the second wh-phrase moves rightward like HDPS. As a result, (17a) is
derived as shown below.

(20) Someone talked about something,but I can’t remember whoi [ ti talked tj ] [about what]j.

In (20), while the first wh-phrase is moved to the Spec-CP in the embedded clause as isnormally expected, the second wh-phrase is moved rightward like HDPS.

These

operations create a phonological constituent for the deletion operation to be applied. Then,the inner constituent can be deleted as illustrated in (20). As a result, MS like (17a) can
be correctly derived.
Lasnik’s analysis that the second wh-phrase in MS undergoes HDPS is very intriguingand plausible because it could explain another property of MS. As seen above, it is pointed
out by Takahashi (1994), Nishigauchi (1998, 1999), Fox and Pesetsky (in prep.) among
others that basically, the second wh-phrase cannot be related to a wh-phrase outside aminimal clause including the second wh-phrase. See (6), represented as (21).

(21) A certain boy said that Fred talked to a certain girl. *I wish I could remember
which boy to what girl.

(Lasnik (2014: 12))116In (21), the first wh-phrase which boy and the second to what girl in the second clausecorresponds to the DP a certain boy and the PP to a certain girl in the antecedent clause,
respectively. However, the MS in this case is not acceptable. This shows that the relation
between the matrix and embedded clause is not possible in MS and MS is subject to a clausemate condition, which rules out (21).
(21) will be easily explained without any further complexities or assumptions if thesecond wh-phrase in MS undergoes rightward focus movement such as HDPS. Since
HDPS is subject to Right Roof Constraint (Ross (1967)), which requires that rightward
movement be limited within a minimal clause, the ungrammaticality of (21) follows fromthe constraint on HDPS.5

Thus, Lasnik’s proposal that the second wh-phrase in MS

involves rightward focus movement, seems to be able to explain more straightforwardly thederivation of MS.

The following section examines whether his proposal is adequate

enough.

4. 2. 2. 2 Where Does the Second Wh-phrase Go?
As we have seen above, Lasnik’s analysis is very interesting and thus seems to be very
plausible because it can captures the facts seen in MS. However, even on his analysis,
some questions remain to be addressed. Although the most prominent point in his proposal
is that the second wh-phrase in MS undergoes rightward focus movement, it has not been
discussed precisely how the rightward moved second wh-phrase is interpreted as aquestioned element together with the first wh-phrase, which I claim is still controversial.
In fact, his account stops short of showing clearly how and to which position the second whphrase is moved in MS. Besides, as Nishigauchi (1998) pointed out, MS prefers a pair list
reading, but it is not clarified how this will come out. Lasnik (2014) only mentions thatthe second wh-phrase is raised rightward to a position high enough where it is interpreted asa wh-operator, but the final landing site and its interpretation procedure are not precisely
specified. Since his proposal seems to be very impressive and appealing in explaining117

some facts in MS, it is worthwhile to pursue in detail what movement the proposed
rightward focus movement of the second wh-phrase involves and consider how it can beinterpreted together with the first one as question elements. Thus, it is important to see
how we can formalize the rightward focus movement of the second wh-phrase in MS. In
other words, we need to consider whether the rightward wh-movement itself in MS is
possible at all.
For a moment, intuitively, there could be two possible ways to move the second whphrase rightward.

One possibility is that the second wh-phrase moves rightward to a

position outside the TP exactly like HDPS or focus movement and then rises to the CP
position, whether overtly or covertly for interpretation. The other is that since multiple whfronting is prohibited, the second wh-phrase is moved overtly rightward to the right edge of
the CP with the first wh-phrase fronted leftward. Let us see these two possible ways inturn. We will eventually see that the rightward wh-movement is difficult to formalize.
Let us begin with the first option. Suppose that the movement of the second wh-phrase
is exactly a kind of focus rightward movement like HDPS. If so, Lasnik’s account would
be inconsistent with “Criterial Freezing Effect” proposed by Rizzi (2006, 2010). Rizzi
claims that an element attracted by a discourse-related head, a criterial head in his term, such
as FOC(US), TOP(IC), Q(UESTION), and so on, is prevented from moving further toanother criterial head. This is exemplified in (22).

(22) a.

Who thinks that Mary hates which problem?

b. *Who thinks that which problem, Mary hates t?
c.

Who thinks that this problem, Mary hates t?

(Rizzi (2010: 23))

In (22b), the wh-phrase which problem is moved to the topicalized position within theembedded clause just like the object DP in (22c). Due to the freezing effect, however, thetopicalized wh-phrase gets “frozen” in the place, and thus, even the covert wh-movement to118

a higher position as a question operator is blocked. As a result, the sentence (22b) fails toreceive appropriate interpretation unlike (22a). If this is correct, the same reasoning would
hold for MS under Lasnik’s analysis. Observe the following derivation of (20), repeatedas (23).

(23) Someone talked about something,but I can’t remember whoi [ ti talked tj ] [about what]j.

No problem will be raised with regard to the first wh-phrase which has moved leftward to
the embedded CP. What about the second one? If it was moved rightward like in a way
such as HDPS or other focus movement, the wh-phrase would get frozen in the position andbecome unable to receive appropriate interrogative interpretation after it has landed on theright end position. It is, however, pointed out that in an MS context, pair-list reading ispreferred in a subsequent conversion, contrary to expectation. Consider (24)-(26).

(24) a.

I know that in each instance one of the girls got something from one of
the boys. Namely, Jane from Tom, Susan from Tim, etc.
(Nishigauchi (1999: 190))b.

I know that in this instance one of the girls got something from one of
the boys. *Namely, Jane from Tom, Susan from Tim, etc.
(Nishigauchi (1999: 191))(25) a.

I know that in each instance one of the girls got something from one of
the boys. But they didn’t tell me which from which.
(Nishigauchi (1998: 122) cf. Bolinger (1978: 109))b.

I know that in this instance one of the girls got something from one of
the boys. *But they didn’t tell me which from which.
(Nishigauchi (1999: 190))
119

(26) A: In every class, one of the students had to talk about one of the topics givenby the professor, but do you remember which one about which topic?
B: Yes, as far as I know, Brandon talked about the NFL, Dice about theNHL, Cindy about the MLB, and Denver about the NBA.

As shown in (25) and (26), multiple sluicing is only possible when a pair-list reading isavailable. The fact above shows that in MS, the second wh-phrase is required to receive
the interrogative interpretation in accordance with the first wh-phrase. This means that thesecond wh-phrase would have to move to a position where it can serve as an operator even
if it underwent rightward movement.

Although Lasnik (personal communication)comments that the second wh-phrase moves close to a position where it is interpreted as an
operator, it is not clear enough how the procedure of interpreting wh-phrases will be dealt
with.
Take the second option; is there any possibility that the second wh-phrase could moverightward to a CP, instead of being fronted leftward? If the second wh-phrase cannot beinterpreted after focus-related movement or alike for reasons we have just seen, this option
may be worth examining. Let us see whether the second wh-phrase in MS will be able tomove rightward to the CP to receive the interrogative interpretation. In English multiple
wh-questions, the second wh-phrase is normally considered to be frozen in the original
position, I expect that this option of rightward movement in MS would also be less possible.
In fact, there is some evidence that a rightward moved wh-phrase cannot function as anelement to be questioned. According to some of my informants, the examples in (27) and(28), where the second wh-phrase in a multiple wh-question appears to have moved
rightward across an adverbial phrase, are somewhat difficult to interpret as expecting a pairlist reading.

(27) a.

Which student talked about which topic at the PE class?
120

b. ? Which student talked ti at the PE class [about which topic]i?
(28) a.

Which student played which instrument in the concert?

b. ?Which student played ti in the concert [which instrument]i?

In (27) and (28), the relevant second wh-phrase is a PP and a DP, respectively.

My

informants judged that the (a) sentences in (27) and (28)are acceptable as requesting a pairlist answer such as (29), but the (b) sentences are not as unnatural as the (a) sentences, andexpecting such answers is difficult.

(29) a.

Brandon talked about the NFL, Dice about the NHL, Cindy about MLB,and Denver about the NBA.

b.

Brandon played the guitar, Dice the sax, Cindy the trumpet, and Denver
the piano.

In addition, as (30) and (31) show, the embedded multiple wh-questions involvoing
rightward wh-movement are also unnatural. However, they get much improved when they
are put in an MS context in terms of requesting their pair-list answers.

(30) a.

Do you remember which student talked about which topic in the PE class?

b. ? Do you remember which student talked ti in the PE class [about which
topic]i?
c.

In every class, one of the students talked about some topic in the PE class,but I don’t remember which student about which topic.

(31) a.

Do you remember which student played which instrument in the concert?

b. ? Do you remember which student played ti in the concert [which
instrument]i?

121

c.

One of the students played one of the instruments in the concert, but do you
remember which student which instrument?

Note that it has been pointed out that a PP is more preferable than a DP as the second whphrase in MS, but the example in (31c) is not judged to be degraded at all. They eachpermit the answers like (29). This means that although Lasnik’s rightward movement
analysis is very attractive, it is not plausible enough that rightward movement is involved in
MS.6
Besides, even in MS contexts, the second wh-phrase that seems to have been overtly
moved across an adverbial phrase is judged as degraded or unacceptable.

(32) In every class of our PE course, one of the students has to talk about one of thepresented topics. ?*Do you remember which student in yesterday’s class about
which topic?

In (32), the second wh-phrase about which topic is moved across the adverbial phrase inyesterday’s class, but the sentence is not acceptable as an embedded multiple question.
As demonstrated in this section, the analyses by Richards and Lasnik are very interesting
and appealing, but as long as examined here, they still include both empirical and theoreticalproblems to solve.

In the next section, I will tackle this mysterious phenomenon andpropose an alternative analysis of how MS should be derived.

4. 3 An Alternative Analysis Based on Non-Constituent Deletion
4. 3. 1 A Non-movement Analysis of Multiple Sluicing
Given the discussion above, there are mainly two aspects related with a derivation of MS.
One has to do with interpretation of multiple wh-phrases. It is important to consider whatmakes pair-list reading possible in MS. In addition to this, we have to consider how the122deletion operation is applied in MS. The other is the clause-mateness of multiple whphrases in MS. Unlike SS, where a wh-phrase can take wide scope out of an island, themultiple wh-phrases in MS are subject to the clause-mate condition, under which the whphrases in MS must be related within the same clause (the CP category in our framework).
I expect that clarifying a mechanism of explaining these points will provide a more adequate
analysis of the derivation of MS.

4. 3. 1. 1 The Clause-mateness of Wh-phrases in MS
Before exploring an alternative analysis, recall that there is a clause-mate condition
imposed on wh-phrases in MS. This is another intriguing phenomenon and one of the mostdifficult problems to solve. To see again that MS is subject to the clause-mate condition, I
begin with an example of SS such as (33), which looks ambiguous with respect to the scopeof which comet corresponding to the subject in the embedded clause in the antecedent clause.

(33) The scientist suggested that a comet is approaching the earth, but it’s unclear
which comet.

(Nishigauchi (1999: 191))

In (33), which comet in the second clause can be interpreted either as taking wide (larger)
scope over the matrix clause or as taking narrow scope over the embedded clause asparaphrased below.

(34)

a. The scientist suggested that a comet is approaching the earth, but it’s unclear
which comet the scientist suggested is approaching.
b. The scientist suggested that a comet is approaching the earth, but it’s unclear
which comet is approaching.

In the former case, the wh-phrase which comet takes scope over the matrix clause while it123takes only the embedded clause in the latter case. Either of these cases can be easily
available.
However, Nishigauchi points out that in MS like (35a), the relation of the multiple whphrases is only limited within the embedded clause and the relation across the clauseboundary as (35b) is degraded.

(35) a.

Mary said everybody will buy something, but ??it’s not clear who what.
(Nishigauchi (1999: 192))b.

Mary said everybody will buy something, but ??it’s not clear who Mary said
will buy what.

If the second conjunct in (35a) is changed so that the wh-phrases are in the same CP like(36), the sentence will be much better.

(36) Mary said everybody will buy something, but she didn’t say who what.

The examples in (35) and (36) show that it is difficult to take who out of the embedded
clause and interpret it at a position in the matrix clause.
There is another example that indicates one wh-phrase in the matrix clause is not
associated with the second one in the embedded clause.

(37) a. *One of the students said that Mary spoke to one of the professors, but I
don’t know which student to which professor.
b.

(Lasnik (2013: 6))

In each instance, one of the students talked about one of Chomsky’s works,
but I don’t know exactly which about which.

(Lasnik (2013: 6))(37b), where the wh-phrases are in the same clause unlike (37a), is judged to be improved124

in the acceptability. This shows that wh-phrases in MS must observe the clause-matecondition. Recall that in order to explain this property, Lasnik attempts to argue that thesecond wh-phrase undergoes focus rightward movement which is sensitive to Ross’s Right
Roof Constraint, but in the previous section I argued that this rightward movement analysis
is not adequate enough because more complex assumptions would be required for theinterpretation of the multiple wh-phrases.

Thus, it becomes necessary to explain theclause-mateness seen above in an alternative way. For the moment, putting this problem
of clause-mateness aside, I would like to see briefly again the alternative analysis of pair-list
interpretation, based on Baker’s abstract question morpheme (Q-morpheme), which has
been introduced in the previous chapter.

4. 3. 1. 2 Baker’s Q-morpheme Again
In this section, I will discuss how wh-phrases in an elided clause can be interpreted in MS
and what its structure is like. As I have discussed in the previous chapter, extending the
Q-morpheme by proposed by Baker (1970), I assume that the Q-morpheme on a C-Headbinds wh-phrases unselectively (in Heim’s term) without ordinary wh-movement to a CP.
Building on this assumption, I would like to propose that wh-phrases in MS, bound by the
Q-morpheme, stay in situ except some cases where other syntactic features require
movement. Moreover, I will explore a possibility that the second wh-phrase in MS isdifferent from a regular multiple wh-question, but it behaves like a strong quantifier every
in its interpretation.
First, let us review quickly the assumptions I adopted in the last chapter to see how amultiple question is interpreted. Here, I pay attention mainly to multiple wh-questions.
As for multiple wh-phrases and their interpretations, several analyses have been presented
in the literature. In particular, in languages with limited application of wh-movement suchas English, how multiple wh-questions are interpreted is one of the most difficult topics.
To see how they are interpreted, take an example like (38A),which allows a pair-list answer
125

(38B) even though only one wh-phrase is fronted to the Spec-CP.

(38) A: Who brought what for our white elephant yesterday?
B: Dice brought a calendar, Jackie (brought) gloves, and Adam (brought) a
funny pen.

In (38), although only one wh-phrase seems to have been moved to the Spec-CP, the second
wh-phrase is allowed to be interpreted in the same position. To account for this, Baker(1970) assumes the traditional assumption that a wh-phrase function as a “restricted freevariable,” which must be bound by its appropriate operator, and claims that wh-phrases canbe bound by the Q-morpheme on a C-Head. (For Baker’s examples, see Baker (1970:
215).)
Looking at English examples doesn’t give us clear evidence to support the existence of
the Q-morpheme, but Japanese examples, in which no wh-fronting is involved, indicate that
there is a Q-morpheme serving as an operator on a C-Head.

(39) A: Kinou

Darei-ga

Nanij-o kaimashita ka(i, j)yesterday who-Nom what-Acc bought

Q‘Who bought what yesterday?’
B: Mina-wa

Hon-o,

Taro-wa

CD-o,

Jiro-hachizu-wo katta.

Mina-Nom book-Acc, Taro-Nom CD-Acc, Jiro-Nom map-Acc bought‘Mina bought a book, Taro a CD and Jiro a map.’

In (39), the morpheme ka binds dare and nani unselectively at the same time, asking for apair-list answer like (39B). Considering this observation, I have presented the following
assumptions.

126

(40) a. The Q-morpheme has to be phonologically adjacent with a wh-phrase inlanguages with wh-movement such as English, but it does not have to be
adjacent in languages without the movement such as Japanese.
(Adjacency requirement)b. The Q-morpheme can bind variables unselectively.

This is illustrated as in (41) and (42). See also (67) and (68) in Chapter 3.

(41) English-type Languagesa.

[CP WHi [[C-Qi] [… [… WHi …]]]](Single wh-question)b.

[CP WHi [[C-Q(i, j)] [… [… WHi […WHj ]]]]](Multiple wh-question)(The italicized WH stands for the copy of a moved wh-phrase.)(42) Japanese-type Languagesa.

[CP [C-Qi] [… [… WHi …]]]

(Single wh-question)b.

[CP [C-Q(i, j)] [… [… WHi […WHj ]]]](Multiple wh-question)

I assume that (41) and (42) are basic structures of wh-questions.
As discussed in the previous chapter, however, there are some different means by which
the requirement of the phonological adjacency is satisfied. Recall that the requirement of
the phonological adjacency between the Q-morpheme and a wh-phrase can also be satisfied
in some contexts where a wh-phrase does not move to a CP. One of the cases is a situation
when the first wh-phrase is a subject, which is moved to a Spec-TP by the EPP feature in the
T-Head as illustrated in (43).

(43) [CP [C-Qi] [TP WH(subject)i T [v*P WH(subject)i …]]]

In this case, the phonological requirement can be satisfied by a wh-phrase in the Spec-TP as127

(43).
Another case is when a deletion operation is applied to a relevant category. The deletion
will enable a wh-phrase in a different position from a CP to be adjacent to the Q-morpheme.
That is, as long as one wh-phrase and Q morpheme eventually result in being phonologicallyadjacent, overt wh-movement to a CP is not necessarily required even in wh-fronting
languages. This explains the insensitivity of the island condition in SS without serious
problem of applying island-violating movement. This is roughly illustrated as below.

(44) a.

She kissed a man who bit one of my friends, but Tom doesn’t realize which
one of my friends.

b.

[[Qi-C] [TP She [vP kissed a man who bit [which one of my friends]i]]]

In (44), the deletion operation makes the wh-phrase adjacent to the morpheme.
(40) is also supported by the evidence involving MS as below.

(45) a.

I know John was talking with somebody about something, but I don't know
who with about what.

b. *I know John was talking with somebody about something, but I don't know
with who what about.
c. *I know John was talking with somebody about something, but I don't knowwhat with who about.
d. *I know John was talking with somebody about something, but I don't know
who with what about.
e. *I know John was talking with somebody about something, but I don't know
who what with about.

(Richards (2001: 139))

In (45), only the first wh-phrase can be fronted before the preceding preposition. In the128

last chapter, I claimed that in a Swiping context, the (first) wh-phrase could move before thepreposition at PF and this movement could help the wh-phrase to satisfy the adjacency
requirement of the Q-morpheme, instead of the wh-phrase itself moving to the Spec-CP.

(46) a.

Lois was talking (to someone), but I don’t know who to.
(Merchant (2001: 65))b.

I don’t know [CP [Qi-C] [TP Lois was talking [PP whoi [to ti ]]]]In (46), the movement to the edge of PP (if PP counted as one of the phases in the current
theory) makes the wh-phrase adjacent to the Q-morpheme.
If the overt operation “Move” was a composite operation consisting of “Copy, Move, andMerge,” and another operation was expected to be available in a later stage of derivation, it
would be possible to assume that wh-phrases in MS do not have to move unless there is anyother strong feature attracting them such as the EPP feature on a T-Head.7
Considering the discussion here and the assumption that the availability of a pair-list
reading in multiple wh-questions follows from the properties of the Q-morpheme binding
wh-phrases unselectively, we can expect that MS can be derived just like SS. It is also
possible that unlike the first wh-phrase, the second wh-phrase in MS is not motivated tomove at all. Note that it may also be reasonable to assume that the uninterpretable Qfeatures or [-WH] of a wh-phrase, if any, could be valued thanks to the unselective bindingby the Q-morpheme.

4. 3. 1. 3 Unselective Binding of Indefinite Nouns in MS
Next, let us see an antecedent clause in MS. Just like SS, there should be indefinite nounphrases corresponding to the wh-phrases in a sluiced clause in MS, too.

129

(47) SSa.

He likes a certain girl, but I don’t know who (he likes t).

b. *He likes the girl, but I don’t know who (he likes t).
c.

A certain girl loves him, but I don’t know who ( t loves him).

d. *? The girl loves him, but I don’t know who ( t loves him).
(See Chapter 3, Section 3.1 for details.)(48) MSa.

In every class, one of the students had to talk about one of the topics givenby the professor, but do you remember which one about which topic?

b. *In every class, the student had to talk about one of the topics given by theprofessor, but do you remember which one about which topic?
c. *In every class, one of the students had to talk about the topic given by theprofessor, but do you remember which one about which topic?
d. *In every class, the student had to talk about the topic given by the professor,
but do you remember which one about which topic?

As noted above, MS prefers a pair list reading as its answer. This means that just as CLM’s“roofing effect” in SS, an antecedent clause in an MS context denotes that there are two
specific elements presupposed to exist. Then, the wh-phrases in the second conjunct aresupposed to ask about the corresponding indefinite noun phrases. Just like cases of SS,
since indefinites are assumed to be undetermined with respect to their interpretation, theymust be bound by an operator. Therefore, an existential operator binds multiple indefinites
in the first conjunct unselectively in the same way as the unselective Q-morpheme binding
in the second conjunct. This is roughly illustrated as in (49).

(49) [[C-∃(i, j)] [… [… Indef.i […Indef.j ]]]]

130

Thus, (49) ensures that it is presupposed that in the grammatical case (48a), there are one
student and one topic present in each class.
Given this, I assume that an appropriate operator located on a C in each relevant clause in
MS binds unselectively its variables in situ unless there is no other motivation present in the
structures.

4. 3. 2 The Clause-mateness and Properties of the Second Wh-phrase in MS
Now, I turn to the difficult problem of clause-mateness of MS. It is this problem thatworries a lot of linguists interested in explaining the derivation of MS. I will claim that theclause-mateness of MS actually comes from the properties of the second wh-phrase, which
behaves like a strong quantifier every.

4. 3. 2. 1 Is MS an Instance of Gapping?
Although Lasnik’s analysis of rightward movement is not entirely satisfactory in that theanalysis based on the rightward movement of the second wh-phrase in MS is not plausible
enough, his insight on the second wh-phrase basically seems to be correct in a sense.
Lasnik (personal communication) suggests that unlike regular multiple wh-questions, thesecond wh-phrase in MS is phonologically stronger or higher in accent than the first one
while the wh-phrases are both semantically focus-marked as new information.

Thus,

suppose that both of the wh-phrases have a kind of focus feature [F], and the second whphrase involves relatively higher stress marked as high stress (HS) than the first one marked
as low stress (LS). This is illustrated as (50).

(50) a.

Somebody bought something, but nobody told me who[F] <bought>
LS

WHAT[F].
HS

131

b. ?*Somebody bought something, but nobody told me WHO[F] <bought>HSwhat[F].
LS(51) Who brought what for our white elephant yesterday?

In this point, the second wh-phrase in MS is innately different from that in a multiple whquestion (51). That the remnants have a kind of phonological focus is reminiscent ofGapping, which would support the analyses by Nishigauchi (1998) and Abe (2016). Abe(2016) claims that MS is similar to Gapping in that the behavior of remnants in an elided
clause is similar to that of Gapping with respect to clause-mateness. See the examples
below.

(52) *One of the students said that Mary spoke to one of the professors, but I
don’t know which student to which professor.

(Lasnik (2013: 6))(53) *John thinks that Bill will see Susan, and Harry ___ Mary.
(Abe (2016: 151), originally, Abe and Hoshi (1997: 103))

According to Abe, in Gapping, only the focus feature [Focus] of the focus elements in eachconjunct first undergoes covert movement. Then, if it creates string vacuity as a result of
the covert movement, their phonological feature [PF] will be left in its trace position, but if
it ends in non-string vacuity, the phonological feature should be pied-piped to the position
where the focus feature has been moved, obeying the locality condition such as Right Roof
Condition. Under this analysis, due to the string-vacuous movement, in the mono clause
Gapping example (54), all the focus-related elements don’t move phonologically at all.

(54) a.

John like pizza and Bill spaghetti.

132

b.

[TP <John>[Focus] [TP <John>[PF][Focus] Pres [VP like <Pizza>[PF][Focus]]]<pizza>[Focus]] and [TP <Bill>[Focus] [TP[Delete]<Bill>[PF][Focus] Pres [VP like<spaghetti>[PF][Focus]] <spaghetti>[Focus]](Abe (2016: 151))

In (54), the [Focus] feature of the subject is covertly left-adjoined to the TP while the featureof the object is right-adjoined to the same TP. Note that a category which will undergo
deletion is given a [Delete] feature. This feature instructs the PF interface to delete its
category except elements with the [PF] feature. Then, (54a) is finally derived by deletion.
The same analysis is applied to the case of MS. Take (55a), for example.

(55) a. ? One of the students spoke to one of the professors, but I don’t know
which to which.
b.

(Abe (2016: 149))

I don’t know [CP <which>[Focus] [TP[TP[Deletion] <which>[PF][Focus] Past
[VP speak <to which>[PF][Focus]]] <to which>[Focus]]](Abe (2016: 152))

As illustrated in (55b), the [Focus] feature of the first wh-phrase is left-adjoined while thesecond wh-phrase is right-adjoined. Then, the TP marked as [Deleted] is elided with theelements with the [PF] left undeleted. As a result, MS (55a) is derived like (54a).
Adopting this analysis, Abe provides an explanation of the ungrammaticality of MS suchas (52), repeated as (56), where the second wh-phrase is related to the first wh-phrase in thematrix clause. Abe assumes for unspecified reasons that the focus movement of the second
wh-phrase is “inherently covert,” and thus it is subject to locality conditions such as Right
Roof Constraint and the island conditions (Abe (2016: 152)). Thus, the movement of thesecond focus phrase in each conjunct is blocked by the locality condition Abe assumes,
hence the ungrammaticality of (56) just like (53).

133

(56) *One of the students said that Mary spoke to one of the professors, but I
don’t know which student to which professor.

It is claimed that in (56), the second wh-phrase cannot move out of the embedded that-clause.
Abe’s analysis depends largely on the fact that Gapping usually involves more or lesscontrastively stressed elements in the antecedent clause. In (57a), there are two paired
focus relations between <John, Bill> and <pizza, spaghetti>. However, in MS such as(57b), indefinite noun phrases someone and something in the first conjunct corresponding
to the remnant wh-phrases are given a normal or flat tone, and they don’t have such a salient
property.8(57) a.
b.

John likes pizza, and Bill spaghetti.
Someone talked about something, but I don’t know who about what.

Second, Richards (1997, 2001) and Lasnik (2014) also conclude that MS is not absolutely
similar to Gapping. In fact, it is pointed out that there are two differences between Gappingand MS. The first argument against the claim that MS is another instance of Gapping isthat while “Gapping obeys an extraordinary strict locality condition,” MS is not subject tosuch a condition. Compare (58) and (59), which are from Lasnik (2013).

(58) a.

Mary talked about Syntactic structures and John about “Conditions andTransformations.”b. *Mary talked about Syntactic structures and I think John about“Conditions and Transformations.”(Lasnik (2013: 6))(59) In each instance, one of the students talked about one of the Chomsky’s
works, but I don’t know exactly which about which.

134(Lasnik (2013: 6))

In Gapping (58), the gapped clause must be conjoined with the antecedent clause, but thisis not true for MS (59).
The second argument is that MS is more like SS than Gapping because it allows the first
wh-phrase to precede the preposition which it follows.

(60) a.
b.

I know John was talking with somebody, but I don’t know who with.
I know John was talking with somebody about something, but I don’t know
who with about what.

(Richards (2001: 139))

However, Gapping doesn’t permit this order.

(61) Mary was talking with John about ergativity,
a. …and with Bill about the stock market.
b. *…and Bill with about the stock market.

(Richards (2001: 139))

Unlike (60b), (61b), where the first remnant cannot move before the preposition, is judged
to be ungrammatical. These facts show that MS is not an instance of Gapping at all, but it
is similar to SS, but different in that it includes another wh-remnant which acts on par withthe first wh-phrase within the same clause. In the next section, I will see more closely theproperties of the second wh-phrase.

4. 3. 2. 2 The Properties of the Second Wh-phrase in MS
4. 3. 2. 2. 1 The Behavior of a Strong Quantifier
Now that it is clear that MS does not involve movement related to wh-movement, HDPS
and Gapping, I would like to propose a different approach to MS. In order to do this, it isappealing to attempt to pay attention to behavior of another kind of syntactic element locatedin an embedded clause: noun phrases with a strong quantifier, every, in terms of Reinhart
135

(2006).
Interestingly, we can find that the second wh-phrase in MS is very similar to a strong
quantifier such as every in the possibility of taking scope out of a clause. Thus, we will see
it is possible that the clause-mateness of MS would come from the same property of thesecond wh-phrase as the strong quantifier. As seen in the previous chapter, indefinite nounphrases do not obey the island conditions in terms of scope. However, noun phrases witha strong quantifier such as every are subject not only to the island conditions, but also astricter locality condition, the clause-mate condition, in general. Let us see some examples,
beginning with (62).

(62) (∀ > ∃ / ∃ > ∀)Someone attended every seminar.

(Hornstein (1995: 155))(62) is ambiguous with respect to a scopal relation between the indefinite noun phrase
someone and the noun phrase with every. In addition, the same ambiguity is observed in
the case of a sentence includes an infinitival complement of matrix verbs like want or expect.

(63) (∀ > ∃ / ∃ > ∀)a.

Someone expects to dance with every woman.

b.

Someone wants to dance with every woman.
(Hornstein (1995: 78 (24a, b)))

However, this ambiguity will disappear when the strong quantifier is located inside an island.

(64) (∃ > ∀ / *∀ > ∃)a.

Someone met the child that talked to everyone.

b.

Someone wondered whether I talked to everyone.
136

c.

Someone left the meeting before I talked to everyone.
(Johnson (2000: 188))

In (64), the strong quantifier every cannot scope out of the island. Note that just like thestrong quantifier in (64), focused (topicalized, in the sense of Johnson (2000)) phrases arealso “trapped” in an island as shown in (65).

(65) a. *It’s Mary that someone met the child that I talked to t.
b. *It’s Mary that someone wondered whether I talked to t.
c. *? It’s Mary that someone left the meeting before I talked to t.
(Johnson (2000: 188))

The examples in (65) indicate that an element inside an island cannot be a pivot in a cleft
sentence.
In addition to the cases of the islands (64), the strong quantifier is subject to a much tighter
locality constraint than the focused phrase as shown in (66).

(66) Clause-mateness (∃ > ∀ / *∀ > ∃)a. I told someone you would visit everyone. (Johnson (1999: 188))b. One girl knows that every boy bought a present for Mary.
(Fox (2000: 64), (cf. Moltmann and Szabolcsi (1994))
c. Someone thinks that everyone saw you at the rally. (Williams (1986))

The fact seen in (66) shows that the scope of every is only limited within the embedded
clause. In fact, according to Fox (2000), the sentences in (67) sound awkward in the realworld, but still possible when the quantifier is interpreted inside the clause.

137

(67) a.

Someone said that everyone is married to Sue.

b.

Someone said that Sue is married to everyone.

(# ∃ > ∀ / *∀ > ∃)(# ∃ > ∀ / *∀ > ∃)(Fox (2000: 62))c.

At least one professor claims that Ann reads every journal. (∃ > ∀ / *∀ > ∃)(Grano and Lasnik (2018: 466))

In (67), the strong quantifier cannot take scope over the matrix clause, but it can beinterpreted in the lower position.
Notice that unlike (63), the infinitival complement of matrix verbs like hate and claim
prevents the strong quantifier from escaping out of the infinitival clause. Compare (63)and (68).

(68) a.
b.

Someone hates to kiss everyone. (∃ > ∀ / *∀ > ∃) (Hornstein (1995: 169))
Someone claimed to hate everyone . (∃ > ∀ / *∀ > ∃)The facts on control infinitives in (63) and (68) may result from the applicability of“restructuring” an infinitival complement. As discussed in Roberts (1997), Matsuyama(1999), and Hirai (2004), there are some strategies of restructuring to make the complementof verbs such as want and hope more transparent than those such as claim, hate and so on.9
If this restructuring effect is available for the infinitival clauses in (63), sentences like (63)will count as a single sentence. Thus, we can see while a noun phrase with the strong
quantifier can take scope over the other element in a mono clausal context such as (62) and(63), it cannot take scope out of an embedded clause as shown in (64) and (66)-(68). These
facts lead us to the following generalization.

(69) a.

Strong quantifiers are bound in a minimal CP.

b. *[CP1 [c´ C-OPi [TP1 … [CP2 [TP2 … everyi …]]]
138

(cf. Reinhart (2006))10

(69) requires that the strong quantifier be bound in the same clause as its operator.
Otherwise, it cannot be correctly interpreted. In the next, we will see similar properties ofthe second wh-phrase in MS.

4. 3. 2. 2. 2 The Second Wh-phrase in MS as a Strong Quantifier
Now let us turn to MS. Interestingly, the MS construction has phenomena similar toclauses involving the strong quantifier just seen above. Once again, the second wh-phrase
in MS can act with the first wh-phrase only within the same clause, but not across the clauses.
See the sentences in question, reproduced as (70).

(70) a.

I know that in each instance one of the girls got something from one of theboys. But they didn't tell me which from which.

b. *One of the students said that Mary spoke to one of the professors, but I
don’t know which student to which professor.

This phenomenon is similar to the facts observed in the behavior of the strong quantifier
every. We have already seen in the previous section that the strong quantifier located in an
embedded clause cannot take scope out of the clause as given in (66) and (67). However,there are some exceptions where the quantifier can take scope out of an apparent embedded
clause. We have just seen that the subject control infinitival complement of some verbs
such as except or want is more transparent than that of other verbs such as claim or hate interms of the relative scope of the quantifiers. Interestingly, the similar phenomena arefound in the case of MS involving an infinitival complement. MS with the complement
selected by the same verbs as discussed above is permitted by some speakers. Compare(63) and (71). (71b) is from Lasnik (2014: 10).

139

(71) a. ?Some of the students expected to go to some of the lectures, but I’m notsure which to which.?
b. ?Some of the students wanted to go to some of the lectures, but I’m not surewhich to which.

(Lasnik (2014: 10))(71) show that the second wh-phrase can be one of the remnants together with the first whphrase in the matrix clause even when it is inside the infinitival clause. Similarly, the verbs
that disallow the quantifier to extend out of their complement do not allow the second whphrase located inside the clause to be a remnant in MS. Compare again (68) and (72)(72) a. *? Some of the editors claimed to have commented on some book, but
nobody knows which on which book.11
b. *? Some of the students hated to talk to some of the linguists, but nobody told
me which to which.

As (72) shows, MS with verbs like claim and hate is not admitted. This means that the
restructuring effect is available for the second wh-phrase, too and the second wh-phrase issimilar to the strong quantifier.
Another similarity is found in sentences with other infinitival complements.

(73) a.

Someone persuaded John to attend every class. (∃ > ∀ / *∀ > ∃)(Hornstein (1995: 156)))b.

Some of the teachers wanted Bill to attend every course. (∃ > ∀ / *∀ > ∃)c. *Some of the students wanted John to go to some of the lectures, but I’m
not sure which to which.

(Lasnik (2013: 10))(73a, b) are unambiguous because every is interpreted only within the infinitival
140

complement, and it cannot take scope over the subject. Likewise, MS, where the second
wh-phrase is related to the first wh-phrase out of the infinitive, is not permitted.
More interestingly, there is another similarity between the strong quantifier and thesecond wh-phrase with respect to the possibility and interpretability of inverse scope.
Actually, we can see another instance of obviation of the clause-mate condition of MS
pointed out by some speakers. Grano and Lasnik (2018) present an example in (74c),
where the inverse scope is possible exactly in the same environment where MS is admitted.
Compare (74a) and (74b) with (74c).

(74) a. ?[Some of the students]i thought theyi would go to some of the lectures, but
I’m not sure whichj (thought theyj would go) to which.
(Lasnik (2013: 11) originally from Merchant (2001: 113))
b. ?Someonei claims that theyi are worried about something, but I don’t know
whoj (claims that theyj are worried) about what.
(Grano and Lasnik (2018: 471))
c. ?At least one professori claims that shei reads every journal. (∀>∃)(Grano and Lasnik (2018: 467))(74) show that when an embedded clause includes a bound pronoun in the subject position,
an MS and an inverse scope across the clause boundary become possible. According toGrano and Lasnik, in these examples, the CP boundary is extended to the upper CP because
bound pronouns optionally enter the derivation with unvalued features, which voids andextends a locality domain for a syntactic operation if phases are propositional andconvergent as assumed by Chomsky (2000). Therefore, (74) show that the second whphrase is very similar to the strong quantifier.
Given these similarities presented above, it is reasonable to suppose that although thesecond wh-phrase in MS is phonologically focused, it has properties of a strong quantifier141like every in nature. Therefore, we can assume that the second wh-phrase in MS must bebound in the same way as a strong quantifier. This alternative idea on the second whphrase seems to be more adequate because the explanation based on rightward movementof the second wh-phrase is not satisfactory enough for some reasons discussed above.
Recall that multiple wh-phrases are bound by the Q-morpheme in a multiple question.
However, as just pointed out, the second wh-phrase in MS is innately similar to a strong
quantifier and essentially different from wh-phrases in a multiple wh-question in that it isphonologically focused. If the second wh-phrase in MS, which behaves like the quantifier
every, can be bound in situ by the Q-morpheme, the structure including it can be illustrated
as (75).

(75) a.

Since the second wh-phrase in MS has a property of the strong quantifier, it
must be bound by the Q-morpheme in the minimal CP along with the first
wh-phrase.

b. *[CP1 [c´ C-Qi,j [TP1 WHi [CP2 [TP2 … WH(strong quantifier)j …]]]]](cf. * [CP1 [c´ C-OPi [TP1 … [CP2 [TP2 … every(strong quantifier)i …]]]]])In (75a), the second wh-phrase in MS must be bound by the Q-morpheme in the minimal
CP. The clause-mateness in MS follows from the properties of the second wh-phrase,
which are not present in normal multiple wh-questions. I will turn to the clause-matenessof MS in the 4.4.

(We need to assume that this property of the second wh-phrase is

obtained as a result of an accompanied operation of deletion applied to the relevant clausein MS.)

4. 3. 3 LF Parallelism
Now, I would like to consider under what condition the deletion operation can be applied
to MS and claim that the LF parallelism which I have proposed for SS as a licensing
142

condition can also be applied to MS in question. More specifically, I argue that just likeSS, the applicability of the deletion operation for MS depends on the LF structuralparallelism of the operator-variable relation between the antecedent category and the elided
one and that under this identity condition, elements implied in the first conjunct are deleted
except focus-marked elements to avoid overlapped expression.

4. 3. 3. 1 LF Structural Isomorphism for VP Deletion
Although we have discussed a licensing condition of deletion in some detail in theprevious chapter, I will take a moment to see quickly this point again.

As for theapplicability of deletion, strict identity between an antecedent and an elided clause may beeasily characterized in terms of recoverability. In a case of VP deletion like as (76) (= (90)in Chapter 3), whose underlying structure is (77), the strict identity between the antecedentand the elided clause is straightforwardly formalized to determine the possibility of deletion.

(76) a.
b.
(77) a.
b.

I saw the play and so did he.
I have been seeing the play and so has he.
I [T(Past) [VP see the play]] and so [T-did [he [VP see the play]]](76a)

I [T-ASP-have [VP been seeing the play]] and so [T-ASP-has [he [VP been
seeing the play]]](76b)

Similarly, the same condition underlies to license deletion in a case of Gapping like (78).
See the discussion on (98) and (99) in Chapter 3.

(78) a.
b.

John took Harry to the beach, and Bill Mike.
John took Harry to the beach, and [Bill [took Mike to the beach]].

c. *John took Harry to the beach, and [Bill [took Mike to the movies]].

143d. *John took Harry to the movies, and [Bill [recommended Mike themovies]].
e. *John took Harry to the movies, and [Bill [recommended Mike thebeach]].

The possible LF structure of (78a) is only (78b), and the other structures in (78) cannot be
an interpretation available to (78a).
In the last chapter, we have seen that phonological reduction or deletion is licensed only
if the LF of the elided or down-stressed site is structurally isomorphic to that of its antecedent(Fox (2000), Merchant (2001), Fox and Lasnik (2003)). Under this condition, VP deletionas in (79) seems to be explained. If this turns out to be plausible, it is expected to play a
crucial role in determining the applicability of the deletion operation for MS. Suppose that(79a) is derived by deleting the VP met Bill in the second conjunct.

(79) a.
b.

Mary met Bill and Sue did too
Mary met Bill and Sue did [VP met Bill] too.

Since the subject in the v*P in each conjunct is moved to the Spec-TP to satisfy the EPP
feature, it leaves its trace in the original position. This is illustrated as in (80).

(80) a.
b.

The antecedent clause = [TP Maryi ... [v*P ti met Bill]]
The elided clause= [TP Suej ... [v*P tj met Bill]]

As seen in the previous chapter, Merchant (2001) claims that the traces of the subjects arebound by an existential quantifier inserted into the v*P.12 This is roughly illustrated below.

144

(81) a.
b.

The antecedent v*P = ∃x.x met Bill
The elided v*P= ∃x.x met Bill

Note that the trace left by the moved subject is taken as a variable bound by the existential
quantifier (Merchant (2001: Chapter 1)). Based on Schwarzschild’s (1999) GIVENness,
Merchant proposes a version of parallelism, under which the vP in the second clause can bedeleted if and only if the LF structure of the v*P in the second conjunct is identical to that of
the antecedent v*P.13 Thus, the VP deletion in (79a) is admitted because the parallelism issatisfied as illustrated in (81).
Given this, it can be claimed that phonological reduction or deletion can only be admitted
only if the LF dependency of an operator and its variable in the antecedent site and the elided
site is structurally isomorphic to each other. This is also supported by other empirical facts,
which could be disambiguated or narrowed down in their meaning when deletion is
involved. One example is as follows. Consider (82) (= (96) in Chapter 3).

(82) a.
b.

Mary wants to catch a fish.
Mary wants to catch a fish, and John does, too. (Lasnik 2010: 231))

Since (82a) is ambiguous, (82b) would be ambiguous in four ways. However, only two
meanings are available in (82b). It is suggested that the limited meanings in (82b) comefrom the parallelism under which the existential operator for a fish should be inserted in theparallel position in both conjunct. Therefore, that the fact observed in (82b) is explained
under the parallelism based on an operator-variable relation means that LF structuralparallelism is adequate for a possible analysis of elliptical phenomena. As shown here
again, it is reasonable that the parallelism I proposed in the previous chapter is also
applicable to cases of MS. The Parallelism I am assuming for SS is (83).

145

(83) LF Structural Parallelism
Phonological deletion is licensed only if the LF structure of a category that
contains elided material is structurally isomorphic to that of the antecedent.

However, as discussed in the previous chapter, the parallelism in (83) is not strong enoughto decide how deletion is applied to relevant sites in MS any more than the strict identity
condition is.

Such a simple and straightforward condition cannot serve as an identity

condition for MS. Unlike VP deletion, more has to be said in order to apply a deletion
operation appropriately to a structure in MS because there are wh-phrases left undeleted in
the parallel structure while the antecedent structure has indefinite noun phrases. Therefore,
in addition to the parallelism in (83), I suppose that the preceding structure serves aspresupposition or implication for the corresponding structure, and a deletion operation isapplied to as many presupposed or implied elements as possible. This is formalized as(84), which holds for elliptical constructions. Note that this idea is originated in “MaxElide”
by Merchant (2008), Hortman (2011) among others.

(84) Maximal Effect of Deletion
Delete elements marked as [Presupposed] except focus-marked [F] elements.

With the assumptions above, I attempted to explain the derivation of SS in the previous
chapter. A complex instance of SS like (85) is derived as follows.

(85) She kissed a man who bit one of my friends, but Tom doesn’t realize which
one of my friends (*she kissed a man who bit t).

As assumed above, the indefinite noun phrase inside the relative clause in the first sentence
has a specific existential interpretation, bound by an existential closure as illustrated in (86a).
146Under the assumption, the Q-morpheme in the CP of the second clause binds the wh-phrase
in its base-generated position without wh-movement as (86b).

(86) a.
b.

[[C-∃i] [TP She kissed a man who bit [one of my friends]i]][[C-Qi][F] [TP She [vP kissed a man who bit [which one of my friends]i[F]]]][Presupposed]

Since the presupposition of the first clause is reflected on the second conjunct, the relevantsite is marked as [Presupposed] as (86b). The wh-phrase and the operator in the ellipsis
site are marked as [F(ocus)]. The wh-phrase is identical to the indefinite noun phrase in
the antecedent structure in that they are both variables, but they are different from each otherin that they have a different operator. The former has the Q-morpheme and the latter has
the existential operator.

Thus, these operators are also focused due to their different

properties. The important thing is that both structures have the same structural dependency
between an operator and variable like OPx λ [… xthing/one …].

Given this, the LF

structures of (85) are represented as (86), to which Maximal Effect of Deletion is applied.
Thanks to deletion, no phonological elements intervene between the operator and thevariable which one of my friends, and the requirement of the phonological adjacency
requirement of the Q-morpheme is satisfied. As a result, the grammaticality of SS in (85)will come out. The result here indicates that the assumptions above will be worth applying
to an analysis of MS. In the next section, I will suggest that MS is derived under thisassumption just as SS

4. 3. 3. 2 Now Multiple Sluicing
Now I will consider how MS will be derived under the assumption made so far. Take
the first example in this chapter, represented as (87a).

147

(87) a.

I know that in each instance one of the girls got something from one of theboys. But they didn't tell me which from which.

b.

I know that in each instance one of the girls got something from one of theboys. But they didn't tell me which got something from which.

Once again, (87a) is interpreted as (87b). First, see what the structure of the antecedentclause of MS will be like. Recall CLM’s “roofing effect” in SS. As we have seen in theprevious chapter (3. 4. 3. 2), SS is only possible when the antecedent clause implies that
there is something specific in a given context.

(88) a.

She always reads a book at dinnertime. We can’t figure out what/which
one.

b.

Everyone relies on someone. It’s unclear who.

c.

Both dogs were barking at something, but she didn’t know what/what at.
(CLM: 255)

According to CLM, The SS in (88a), for example, is only admitted when there is a book shealways reads at the dinner time. The similar judgement is applied to the other example,
too. That is, SS requires an indefinite noun phrase in the antecedent clause to take scopeover the whole clause. Likewise, MS is only admitted when the existence of a certain pairis presupposed by the antecedent clause. Consider again the examples in (89) and (90).

(89) a.

I know that in each one of the girls got something from one of the boys.
Namely, Jane from Tom, Susan from Tim, etc.

b.

I know that in this instance one of the girls got something from one of theboys. *Namely, Jane from Tom, Susan from Tim, etc.

148

(90) a.

I know that in each one of the girls got something from one of the boys. But
they didn’t tell me which from which.

b.

I know that this instance one of the girls got something from one of
the boys. *But they didn’t tell me which from which.

(89) shows that a pair-list reading is forced when the event in the embedded clause ismodified by the adverb each. Just like (89), the MS in (90) becomes possible only in thesame context. This means that MS is not permitted unless there is a specific pair list
presupposed in the antecedent clause. If an indefinite noun phrase must be bound by anexistential operator so that they are properly interpreted, the LF structure of the antecedent
CP will be schematized as (91).

(91) a.

[C-∃<i, j> [TP [one of the girls]i T [v*P [one of the girls]i v* [VP got something[from [one of the boys]j]]]]]

149

b.

CP

C-∃<i.j>TP[one of the girls]i

T´

T

v*P

[one of the girls]i

v*´

v*

VP

V´

[from [oneof the boys]j]got

somethingIn (91), the existential quantifier on the C-Head binds the indefinite noun phrases
unselectively. Note that the subject one of the girls is moved from the v*P internal subject
position to the Spec-TP for the EPP feature with its copy left in the position.14
Just like the antecedent clause, the indirect question in the second clause also force a pairlist reading.

Thus, under the assumption, the Q-morpheme in the C-Head binds

unselectively the wh-phrases exactly in the same way as in the antecedent clause. Thisestablishes within the CP clause an embedded interrogative requesting a pair-list reading.
This is illustrated as (92).

(92) a.

[C-Q<i, j> [TP whichi T [vP whichi v [VP got something [from [which]j]]]]]

150

b.

CP

C-Q<i.j>[F]TP

PF adjacent

whichi[F]

T´

T

v*P

whichi

v*´

v*

VP

V´

got

[from which]j[F]somethingSince the CP structure constructed this way counts as a phase, it is the point for the
structure to go through TRANSFER, which sends the construed the CP to the PF and LF
interfaces.

At the same time, both of the LF structures undergo interpretation.

In

Chomsky (1995) and subsequent works, it has also been suggested that some syntactic
objects can be constructed independently of each other and they will be merged at a certain
stage of their derivation. If so, the embedded CPs of the antecedent and the elided will besent to the interfaces simultaneously. At the interfaces, the LF parallelism I have proposed
above, as restated below, will be checked for both CPs.

151

(93)

LF Structural Parallelism
Phonological deletion is licensed only if the LF structure of a category that
contains elided material is structurally isomorphic to that of the antecedent.

Keep (93) in mind, let us see the LF structures of the relevant category represented in (94).

(94) a.

[C-∃<i, j> [TP [one of the girls]i T [vP [one of the girls]i v [VP got something[from one of the boys]j]]]]b.

[C-Q<i, j> [TP whichi T [vP whichi v [VP got something [from which]j]]]]As shown in (94), like the case of SS, the LF structures of each CP are identical to each otherin that they have the same dependencies of operator and variable relationship as in (95),where the operator binds the variables unselectively.

(95) OP<x, y> [… [xthing/one] …. [ything/one]]

As a result, the LF structural parallelism in (93) is correctly satisfied, and the second clauseis now ready to undergo an elliptic operation.
However, under the mechanism of the parallelism, it is not precisely specified what aredeleted for MS to be correctly derived? Then, the second condition (96) will work on the
structures.

(96) Maximal Effect of Deletion
Delete elements marked as [Presupposed] except focus-marked [F] elements.

Although the LF structures of the antecedent and the elided clause are identical in that theyeach consist of an operator and its variable in the same manner, the innate properties of the152operators and the variables are different. Besides, as mentioned earlier, Howard Lasnik(personal communication) related to me that the remnants in a MS context are usuallyphonologically focused as repeated as (97).

(97) Somebody bought something, but nobody told me who[F] <bought> WHAT[F].
LS

HS

Therefore, suppose that the operator and its variable in the elided CP are focus marked as
illustrated as (97). Then, the deletion operation is applied to the structure (98a).

(98) a.

[[C-Q<i, j>][F] [TP whichi[F] T [vP whichi v [VP got something [fromwhich]j[F]]]]]]14b.

[[C-Q<i, j>][F] [TP whichi[F] T [vP whichi v [VP got something [fromwhich]j[F]]]]]]c.

[Presupposed][Presupposed]

I know that in each instance one of the girls got something from one of theboys. But they didn't tell me which from which.

After the deletion operation is applied to (98a) as shown in (98b) under the Maximal Effectof Deletion, the MS in question will be finally derived as (98c).
In addition to the MS (90) including a subject wh-phrase, the same analysis can be applied
to another MS including multiple wh-phrases in a VP like (99).

(99) I know John was talking with somebody about something, but I don’t know (with)
who about what.

(cf. (Richards (2001: 139))

In (99), two wh-phrases are located within the VP in the embedded clause. Given theassumption adopted here on indefinite noun phrases and wh-phrases, the structures of therelevant CP are illustrated as (100), where the properties of the complement of each153

preposition are percolated up to each PP and the PPs.

(100) a.

[[C-∃<i, j>] [TP John was-T [vP v [VP talking [with somebody]i [aboutsomething]j]]]]b.

[[C-Q<i, j>][F] [TP John was-T [vP v [VP talking [with who]i[F] [about what]j[F]]]]]

Based on the presupposition denoted by (100a), the wh-phrases as well as the operator are[F]-marked because they are indeterminate elements just like the indefinite noun phrases in(100a) but they are bound by the different operator. (100b) is isomorphic to (100a), the LF
structural parallelism is satisfied as required, the Maximal Effect of Deletion is applied to(100b) as illustrated in (101).

(101)[[C-Q<i, j>][F] [TP John was-T [vP v [VP talking [with who]i[F] [about what]j[F]]]]][Presupposed]

As (101) shows, the deletion operation makes the first wh-phrase with with phonologicallyadjacent to the Q-morpheme. As a result, MS (99) is correctly derived. However, thedeletion operation assumed here is against the conventional assumption that a deletion
operation must be applied to a maximal projection or syntactic constituent.

In thefollowing section, I will consider this problem.

4. 3. 4 Partial Deletion in a Syntactic Constituent
The traditional assumption widely accepted regarding deletion is that deletion operations
should be applied to a syntactic constituent, namely a maximal projection. This generalassumption seems to be correct in a sense.

See an instance of VP deletion (102), forexample.

(102) a.

John saw Mary and Bill did, too.
154

b.

John [VP saw Mary] and Bill did [VP saw Mary], too.

In the case of VP Deletion above, the deletion site is identified under strict identity and thesyntactic constituent, the maximal projection VP, is deleted. Since a deletion operation isassumed to applied to a syntactic constituent in this way, how remnants base-generated inellipsis sites escape from the deletion operation has long been discussed.
In the analysis of MS I have proposed, however, I claim that a non-maximal projection
undergoes a deletion operation as just seen above. This means that my analysis here seems
to run counter to this traditional assumption. However, my analysis is not necessarily sounreasonable if we look into other elliptical phenomena. First, see the structure of (98) indiscussion as schematized in (103).

155

(103)CP

C-Q<i.j>[F]TP

PF adjacent

whichi[F]

T´

T

v*P

whichi

v*´

v*

VP

V´

got

[from which]j[F]something

As seen above, since the wh-phrase from which stays in situ, the deletion operation is applied
to the inner elements inside the TP. In this respect, my analysis is not consistent with theconventional assumption.
Next, let us take an instance of MS in Japanese, in which wh-phrases are basicallyassumed not to be overtly moved.

156

(104) a.

Minna-gananika-okatta

ga, watashi-wa [CP dare-ga

everyone-Nom something-Acc bought but, I-Nom
nani-owho-Nomka] shiranai.

what-Acc Q know-not‘Everyone bought something, but I don’t know who what.
b.

Minna-ga nanika-o katta ga, watashi-wa [CP [TP [dare-ga]i [T [v*P ti nani-okatta]]] ka] shiranai.

Since, in Japanese wh-questions, wh-phrases are assumed not to be moved except in somecontexts such as scrambling, the deletion operation applied to MS as shown in (104b) is
quite natural.
Another example to support the operation of the partial deletion can be observed in
Gapping within a DP (105).

Some of my informants judge (105b) as marginallyacceptable.

(105) a.

John read Bill’s few books about syntax and Mary’s about semantics.
(Yoshida (2004: 257))b.

I like Jeff’s exciting story about his success, but I don’t like Cindy’s about
her life.

In (105), the NP within the object DP in the second conjunct appears to be deleted. If
deletion is applied to a maximal projection, Cindy’s in the Spec-DP and the complement
about her life must be moved out of the projection. However, it is unclear where and how
they are moved within the DP.

Therefore, it is reasonable to suggest that (105b), forexample, can be derived as illustrated in (106).

(106) I don’t like [DP Cindy’s [NP exciting [N´ story [about her life]]]].
157

In (106), the deletion is applied selectively to the elements in the DP. Therefore, I canconclude that it is possible to apply the similar partial deletion to an inner structure in MS.

4. 4 Consequences
So far, I have proposed the following points: (i) that the Q-morpheme has a phonologicalcondition that requires one wh-phrase to be phonologically adjacent to it in English and it
can also binds unselectively multiple wh-phrases, (ii) that the second wh-phrase has aninnate property of a strong quantifier such as every, which is strictly subject to locality
condition that it should be bound in the minimal CP dominating the wh-phrase, (iii) that LF
structural parallelism must be properly satisfied at the CP for deletion and (iv) as many
elements in a structure to undergo deletion that are presupposed in the antecedent structure
are deleted as possible. Let us see how my analysis here can explain other phenomena ofMS.
Let us turn to the clause-mateness of (21) again, repeated as (107), where which boy andwhat girl in the sluiced clause correspond to the matrix subject and the embedded object in
the preceding clause, respectively.16 Suppose that the LF structure of (107a) is represented
as (107b).

(107) a.

A certain boy said that Fred talked to a certain girl. *I wish I could
remember which boy to what girl.

b.

A certain boy said that Fred talked to a certain girl. *I wish I could
remember [CP which boy [TP said [CP that [TP Fred talked to what girl]]]].

The wh-phrases, however, cannot be remnants for the MS in this case.

Theungrammaticality of (104) is explained straightforwardly under the assumptions justsummarized above.

The existential operator inserted in the matrix C-Head of theantecedent clause binds the indefinite nouns unselectively as (108a). On the other hand, if
158the Q-morpheme is located in the parallel position in the embedded C-Head, the LF structureof the CP will be like (108b).

(108) a.

[CP C-∃<i,j> [TP a certain boyi said [CP that [TP Fred talked to [a certain girl]j]]]]b.

[CP C-Q<i,j> [TP which boyi[F] said [CP that [TP Fred talked [to what girl]j[F]]]]]

Although the LF structures in (108) satisfy the LF structural parallelism, the second whphrase in the remote CP cannot be bound by the Q-morpheme because of the innate natureof a strong quantifier borne by the second wh-phrase in MS. The unavailability of thebinding results in ruling out the MS in (107a).
Here is another example of MS that supports my analysis. See (35a) and (36) again,
repeated as (109a) and (109b), respectively. The fact that (109b) is a little better than
(109a) comes from the proposals here.

(109) a. ?? Mary said everybody will buy something, but it’s not clear who what.17b.

Mary said everybody will buy something, but she didn’t say who what.

Take (109b), first. Recall that a strong quantifier must be interpreted only within a minimal
clause. Indeed, a strong quantifier such as every in an embedded clause cannot take wide
scope over its matrix clause, and the interpretation is only limited to an embedded clause as
shown in (110).

(110) One girl knows that everybody bought a present for Mary. (*∀>∃ / ∃>∀)
(Fox (2000: 65))(110) can be true if and only if there is only a certain girl who knows that persons eachbought one present for Mary, instead of the situation that there is one person for each girl159

who knows that s/he bought a present for Mary.

If so, the first conjunct of (109a) will beillustrated as (111a). Then, if the Q-morpheme binds the wh-phrases so that the intended
meaning can come out, its structure should be like (111b), where the Q-morpheme binds thewhole clause.

(111) a.
b.

[Mary said [CP [C-<∀i-∃j>] [TP personi [will buy thingj ]]]]]
it’s not clear [CP C-Q<i, j> [TP Mary said [CP [TP whoi will buy whatj ]]In (111), not only is the second wh-phrase unbound by the Q-morpheme under (69), but also
they will fail to satisfy the LF structural parallelism because the structures eventually derived
are not identical to each other. As a result, (109a) is be judged as degraded.
On the other hand, the second conjunct of (109b) is represented as (112).

(112) a.
b.

[CP [C-<∀i-∃j>] [TP personi [will buy thingj ]]]…, but she didn’t say [CP C-Q<i, j>[F] [TP whoi[F] [will buy whatj[F]]]][Presupposed]

In (112), the quantifiers on the C-Head bind their variables in (112a) while the Q-morpheme
located in the embedded C-Head is able to bind the wh-phrases unselectively in (112b).
Although two operators are inserted into the C-Head in the antecedent clause, they form one
amalgamated C-Head.

Therefore, both structures are able to satisfy the LF structuralparallelism (69), hence, the improved acceptability as (109b).
Finally, I will see a complex phenomenon similar to (113), pointed out by Fox and
Pesetsky (in prep.). They argue that MS is still possible across the clause boundary bypresenting the example below.

(113) Fred thinks that a certain boy talked to a certain girl.
a. I wish I could remember which boy to what girl.
160

b. I wish I could remember which boyi [Fred thinks [ ti talked to what girl]].

If (113a) could be interpreted as (114b), (107a) should be acceptable, too, contrary to thefact. Fox and Pesetsky claim, based on the Ordering Table, that as long as the wh-phrases
are in the same phase, MS would be possible even out of the embedded clause. However,Lasnik points out that if the matrix verb think was replaced with verbs such as deny or doubt,
MS will be still unacceptable.

(114)

Fred denied that a certain boy talked to a certain girl.
??? I wish I could remember which boy to what girl.

(115)(Lasnik (2013: 12))

Fred doubts that a certain boy talked to a certain girl.
?* I wish I could remember which boy to what girl.

(Lasnik (2013: 12))(116) ?* Fred asserted/claimed/urged that a certain boy talked to a certain girl.
I wish I could remember which boy to what girl.

Following Lasnik’s speculation, suppose that a short source, a sort of accommodation, isapplied to the second sentence in (113), and that it is paraphrased into a sentence like I wish
I could remember which boy talked to what girl because the verb think is not informationallyvaluable. However, this accommodation procedure is not available to (114)-(116) because
those matrix verbs imply more than thinking or saying. Thus, the relevant structure of(116) will be (117) because the matrix verb asserted, for example, is not omitted,.

(117) [CP C-∃<i, j> [Fred asserted [that a certain boyi talked to a certain girlj]]]
I wish I could remember …
[CP C-Q<i,j>[F] [Fred asserted [that [which boyi[F] [to what girlj][F]]]].
[Presupposed]

In (117), although the parallelism and the phonological requirement of the Q-morpheme are161both satisfied, the second wh-phrase is unreachable from the matrix C-Head. Thus, (114)(116) are ruled out.

4. 5 Conclusion
In this chapter, I have proposed an alternative analysis of MS by arguing that remnant whphrases in a sliced clause of MS are not moved unless there is any requirement such as the
EPP feature on a T-Head, but they are bound in their base generated positions by Baker’s Qmorpheme.

Assuming that indefinite noun phrases and remnant wh-phrases areindeterminate elements to be bound by their relevant operator, I have claimed that theapplicability of a deletion operation to MS is determined under the LF structural parallelismof the operator-variable relation in both an antecedent and its corresponding elided structure.
Moreover, supposing the phase-theoretic minimalist framework that TRANSFER is applied
to each phase, mapping a constructed phase to LF and PF, I have suggested that the LF
parallelism is evaluated at a CP phase and that with the satisfaction of the parallelism, theMaximal Effect of Deletion requires as many elements presupposed in an antecedent to bedeleted as possible except focus elements.

That is, it is demonstrated that the LF

parallelism determines the applicability of deletion, and partial deletion at PF is a possible
operation to explain the phenomena of MS. Consequently, my analysis here presents a
new idea that a deletion operation can be applied even to elements that don’t form a syntactic
constituent, contrary to the conventional assumption that deletion should be applied to a
constituent or a maximal projection.

Notes for Chapter 4* This chapter is a revised and extended version of the papers that appeared in Kindai
University Center for Liberal Arts and Foreign Language Education Journal, Foreign
Language Edition, 6 (2), (Hirai (2015)) and JELS 34, (Hirai (2017)), the latter of which was162presented at the 34th Conference of the English Linguistic Society of Japan, held at
Kanazawa University on November 12-13, 2016. I would like to thank my colleagues,
Joshua Cohen and Alison Kitzman, for their comments as informants and the participants ofthe conference for their helpful comments and discussion.

1. Some languages such as Bulgarian allow multiple wh-phrases to be fronted. For someexamples and extensive discussion on how they are derived, see Richards (1997) among
others.
2. As I have discussed in the previous chapters, I assume that the PF Deletion approach toelliptical phenomena is basically correct and the deletion operation is applied to a structure
built in the syntactic component. See the discussion in the previous chapters.
3. Fox and Pesetsky (2004) and (in prep.) imply that MS can be analyzed in terms ofphonological linearization within the phase-based theory.

Although their analysis is

intriguing and worth examining more closely, precise explanation of its derivation has notbeen presented. See note 5.
4. It is also suggested that the strong feature should be erased as soon as it is introduced in
the derivation. Thus, even if the head has the strong and weak feature at the same time,
the strong one must be the first to induce movement.
5. Fox and Pesetsky (2004) and (in prep.) imply that the clause-mateness of MS in terms ofphonological linearization within the phase-based theory and imply that in MS, all whphrases must be in the same phase, more specifically, a vP phase, in order for all the whphrases to be phonetically linearized at PF. Their fundamental proposal is that “when two
wh-phrases are not phase mates, they are not ordered directly.

Their relative order isdetermined via elements which are at the edge of the intervening phases.

If theseconnecting links are deleted, phonology doesn’t know what to do with the remaining
elements” (Fox and Pesetsky (in prep. : 27)). I will turn to their analysis in the section 4.
6. Lasnik’s analysis may be worth pursuing further if we assumed that the rightward
163

movement could be induced by a stylistic operation at PF and the wh-phrase can beinterpreted at LF. As another possibility, rightward wh-movement could be real, and there
could be something illegitimate left in the (b) examples, which was erased in the case of MS.
However, I have no idea what could be involved in this analysis.
7. Howard Lasnik (personal communication) pointed out that this analysis would contain aproblem of “look-ahead” derivation. However, as long as there is no feature attracting an
overt movement, the wh-phrase does not have to move.
8. Howard Lasnik (personal communication) showed to me that the indefinite element in
the first conjunct in SS is never phonologically focused, either, but the matrix verb is evenmore strongly stressed than the indefinite noun phrase as presented in (i).
(i)

John MET somebody, but I don’t know who.

In (i), who is also considered to be stressed due to a property of new information.
Abe notes that in an instance of Exceptional Case Marking constriction (ECM), Gapping is
admitted as in (ii).
(ii)

John expected Bill to leave, and Bill John.
(Abe (2016: 152) originally (Abe and Hoshi (1997: 129))

Although Abe states that the ECM subject undergo “non-string vacuous ‘covert’ movement
at the right edge,” it is not clearly explained why the second element in the antecedent clausedoes not have to be overtly moved to the edge in a parallel way.
9. Particularly, Hirai (2004) claims that this difference follows from the categorial differencein CP phases, instead of restructuring relevant clauses. While the category of the infinitival
complement of verbs such as hate, claim and so on is a “strong CP phase” with a factive
operator in its Spec-CP, forming a full (embedded) clause, the category of the infinitival
clause of verbs such as expect or want is a weak CP phase, which makes the clause a monoclause.
10. Reinhart (2006: 60) claims that “[S]trong quantifiers are ‘roughly’ clause-bound”
because strong quantifiers can be interpreted out of small clauses, ECM and infinitival
164

clauses although Hornstein (1995) claims that in the believe-type ECM, the scope of theembedded strong quantifier is limited within the complement.
11. Grano and Lasnik judge (i) given below to be somewhat acceptable.
(i) Someone claims/tends to be worried about something but I don’t know who (claims/
tends to be worried) about what.
See Grano and Lasnik (2018) for some statistic data.
12. For the details of this operation, see Merchant (2001: 26-27) and the previous chapter ofthis paper.
13. It would not be problematic that the operator is inserting into the level of a v*P. As
Chomsky (2000) and his subsequent works suggest, a v*P and a CP count as a phase andthey are subject to a derivational operation TRANSFR, which hands constructed objects
over to LF and PF. Under this assumption, they form units to go through such syntactic
operations related with interpretation. Thus, it is possible to assume that the parallelism of
the structural isomorphism proposed here should be checked in accordance with otherprocedures of interpretations.
14. Since the movement of the subject in (91) is an instance of A-movement, the trace (copy)of the subject may be considered not to be a variable. However, the structure assumed in(91) is not a devastating problem to my analysis because the first conjunct has the samestructure as the second conjunct in the binding relation, and each operator binds its variablein the parallel way.
15. The preposition with the second wh-phrase can also be focus marked even though it ismentioned in the first conjunct because the wh-feature of the second wh-phrase in thecomplement of the P-Head percolates up to the PP, which serves as an amalgamated whphrase as mentioned in the previous chapter.
16. See also 4.3.2.2.2. for more examples.
17. Some of my informants judged (109a) repeated as (i) as possible if it is interpreted as(ib). Thus, their judgement matches the analysis here.
165

(i) a. ??Mary said everybody will buy something, but it’s not clear who what.
b. Mary said everybody will buy something, but it’s not clear [who [will buy] what].
As a possible interpretation of (ia), only the embedded clause in the first conjunct isconsidered to be deleted as (1b).

166

Chapter 5
On Pseudogapping*

5. 1 Introduction

So far, I have explored an alternative derivation of Single Sluicing (SS) and Multiple
Sluicing (MS) by making the following proposals related with the LF Parallelism andMaximal Effect of Deletion as (1).

(1) a. LF Structural Parallelism
Phonological deletion is licensed only if the LF structure of a category that
contains elided material is structurally isomorphic to that of the antecedent.

b. Maximal Effect of Deletion
Delete elements marked as [Presupposed] except focus marked [F] elements.

In this last chapter, extending the assumptions above, I would like to explore an alternative
analysis of another interesting elliptical phenomenon, referred to as “Pseudogapping” by
Levin (1978). Some examples of the phenomenon are given in (2), which are interpreted
as (3). The φ in (2) indicates a phonological blank, which corresponds to the bracketedmaterial in (3). The examples in (2a)-(2c) are from Jayaseelan (1990) (originally citedfrom Sag (1976) and Halliday and Hasan (1973)), and those in (2d)-(2f) from Levin (1978).1(2) a.

Mary hasn’t dated Bill, but she has φ Harry.

b.

It doesn’t bother Harry that Bill left, but it does φ me φ.

c.

A: Is she suing the hospital?
167

B: She is φ the doctor.
d.

If you don’t believe me, you will φ the weatherman.

e.

I rolled up a newspaper, and Lynn did φ a magazine.

f.

Kathy likes astronomy, but she doesn’t φ meteorology.

(3) a.

Mary hasn’t dated Bill, but she has [dated] Harry.

b.

It doesn’t bother Harry that Bill left, but it does [bother] me.

c.

A: Is she suing the hospital?
B: She is [suing] the doctor.

d.

If you don’t believe me, you will [believe] the weatherman.

e.

I rolled up a newspaper, and Lynn did [roll up] a magazine.

f.

Kathy likes astronomy, but she doesn’t [like] meteorology.

As shown above, in Pseudogapping, a matrix verb is deleted with an auxiliary and elementsin the VP left as remnants in the second clause.
Looking at these examples, we can see that Pseudogapping is a mixed construction with
Gapping as (4) and VP Deletion as (5), which are also interpreted as (6) and (7), respectively.

(4) a.
b.

John loves Mary, and Bill φ Jane.

(Jayaseelan (1990: 73))

A: Ivan is now going to peel an apple.
B: And Jorge, φ an orange.

(Hankamer and Sag (1976: 410))(5) John loves Mary, and Bill does φ too.
(6) a. John loves Mary and Bill [loves] Jane.
b. B: Jorge [is (now) going to peel] an orange.
(7) John loves Mary, and Bill does [love Mary], too.

In Gapping (4), an auxiliary and the following verb are deleted with some elements left asremnants out of deletion while in VP deletion (5), there is an auxiliary left intact with thefollowing VP deleted.

Thus, we can see that Pseudogapping has properties of both

Gapping and VP Deletion.
168

In addition to these properties, Pseudogapping has another empirical fact that otherelements in a separate position within a VP can also be deleted along with a matrix verb as
shown below.

(8) a.
b.

I didn’t expect your mother to like the picture, but I did φ you φ.
I didn’t expect your mother to like the picture, but I did [expect] you [to likethe picture].

In (8a), the embedded infinitive clause following the direct object is deleted together withthe matrix verb. Given the standard assumption adapted in the generative grammar that adeletion operation is applied to a constituent or a maximal projection, it is important to
explore a more adequate analysis of Pseudogapping because this construction appears to
involve a sort of non-constituent deletion. In fact, there have been a lot of debates on its
derivation in the literature. Specifically, since Jayaseelan (1990), it has been assumed that
Pseudogapping involves a derivational procedure similar to VP deletion with all remnants
moved out of a projection (VP or v*P) which undergoes deletion. Therefore, it has been
discussed how a VP domain to delete will be created, and there are some analyses proposedon movement of remnants out of a deleted domain. However, it is still unclear how aderivation should proceed within the framework I am pursuing. Thus, Pseudogapping isanother construction worth examining with respect to its derivation just as I have done forthe sluicing constructions. In this chapter, I would like to explore a possible derivation of
Pseudogapping under the assumptions proposed so far.2

This chapter consists of four

sections. In the next section, I will review the previous analyses by Jayaseelan (1990) and
Lasnik (1999), and consider some empirical and theoretical problems with their analyses.
Then, in the section 3, I will propose an alternative analysis by arguing that a Pseudogapping
element is not moved, but it is marked in its base-generated position as a Focus [F] element
by a Peripheral [P-] feature on v*-Head suggested by Chomsky (2000) and that by adopting(1), Pseudogapping is derived with non-consituent deletion. In the later part of the section
3, I will consider some phenomena in Pseudogapping involving a double object construction169and a dative construction. The discussion in this chapter presents a new analysis that
contrary to the conventional assumption, non-constituent deletion is also applicable toPseudogapping just like SS and MS discussed in the previous chapters.

5. 2 Previous Analyses
First, I examine two previous analyses proposing two different kinds of movement ofremnants in an elided clause. Then, I will consider the adequacy of the proposals and piit
out problems associated with these analyses.

5. 2. 1. 1 Jayaseelan (1990) -HNP(DP)S ApproachJayaseelan (1990) proposes an intriguing analysis, arguing that Pseudogapping remnants
is focused invariably undergoing Heavy DP Shift (HDPS) and a VP dominating their
original positions is deleted by VP Deletion, which is roughly illustrated in (9).3(9) a.
b.

Mary hasn’t dated Bill, but she has φ Harry.
…but she has [VP [VP dated ti ] Harryi ].

(Harry is HDP-Shifted)

According to Jayaseelan, the HDP-Shifted remnant Harry is right-adjoined to the matrix VP(Stowell (1981) and Kayne (1985)) and the inner projection is deleted as (9).
His argument that Pseudogapping is related to HDPS is based on some facts as shown
below. One instance is that a possible remnant would receive contrastive stress. He
suggests that Pseudogapping is impossible unless contrastive stress is possible. Compare(2c) with (10).

(10) A:Is she suing the hospital?

B: *Yes, she is φ it.

(Jayaseelan (1990: 65))

He assumes that contrastive stress makes a relevant element “heavy” and argues that (10) is
ungrammatical because the pronoun it cannot be contrastively stressed and thus it cannot be
170

HDP-Shifted. If contrast stress and heaviness are involved with HDPS, Jayaseelan’s claim
is consistent with a fact that a candidate undergoing HDPS is not limited to DP.4

(11) You can’t count on a stranger, but you can φ on a friend.

(φ=count)(Jayaseelan (1990: 64))

In (11), the PP is left as a remnant and the sentence is still as good as the examples above.
In fact, the same PP can be right-adjoined over the adjunction to be focused as presented in(12b).

(12) a.
b.

John counted [PP on a total stranger] for support.
John counted for support on a total stranger.

(Jayaseelan (1990: 66))(12b) with the shifted PP is as acceptable as (11) where the same PP is left undeleted. The
similar grammaticality can be found in another example. In a case where an object cannot
be HDP-Shifted with its preceding preposition stranded as (13a), the corresponding
Pseudogapping is not possible, either. Compare (13a) with (13b).

(13) a. *John counted on for support a total stranger.
b. *You can’t count on a stranger; but you can a friend.
(Jayaseelan (1990: 66))(13b), where the phrasal verb count on is deleted, is as unacceptable as (13a). This meansthat there is a possibility that remnants in Pseudogapping undergoes HDPS in order to moveout of a deletion site.
Another argument can be seen in a fact discussed by Stowell (1981) that only one
constituent can be adjoined to VP, which Jayaseelan calls “Double Adjunction Constraint.”(14) a.

It proved his guilt to the jury that John was seen with the murder weapon.
171

b. *It proved t to the jury his guilt that John was seen with the murder weapon.
(Jayaseelan (1990: 66), Originally, Stowell (1981: 161))

Suppose that the finite clause in (14a) is first extraposed and adjoined to the matrix VP. In(14b), the direct object his guilt cannot be adjoined to the same projection by the following
operation because this violates the constraint. The similar phenomenon is also observedin Pseudogapping with a dative construction, where two elements are not allowed to moveout of the deletion site as remnants. Consider (15).

(15) *I didn’t give a dime to Mary, but I did φ a nickel to Jane.
(Jayaseelan (1990: 66))

In (15), the Double Adjunction Constraint prevents the object and the dative phrase frombeing adjoined to the VP. Thus, it is claimed that (15) is ruled out because HDPS is
involved in Pseudogapping.
Now, one may wonder why (2b) repeated as (16a), in which the direct object seems to beadjoined to VP to which the finite clause is assumed to be obligatory extraposed (Stowell(1981)), is acceptable if this constraint holds.

(16) a.
b.

It doesn’t bother Harry that Bill left, but it does φ me φ.
It doesn’t [VP [VP [VP bother ti tj ] [that Bill left]j ] Harryi ],but it does [VP [VP [VP bother tk tl ] [that Bill left]l ] mek ](adapted from Jayaseelan (1990: 73))

According to Jayaseelan (1990: 73), “adjunction is an option available to any constituent, inany component of the grammar,” and the finite clause and the object in the antecedent VP
are adjoined at LF while the adjunction in the deleted VP takes place in the Syntax.
Moreover, it is assumed that Double Adjunction Constraint only matters at PF. Therefore,
the LF adjunction in the antecedent VP does not become a problem, and the adjunction in172the deleted VP is not a problem, either, because the adjoined finite clause is deleted at PF.
Note that the movement of the focused remnant me over the relatively heavy finite clause ispermitted because the surface string does not come out as it has been moved at the Syntax.5
Therefore, (16) is correctly derived without violating the constraint.
As demonstrated above, Jayaseelan’s analysis based on HDPS is interesting and provides
the first stepping stone for analyses of this construction. In the following section, I willconsider possible problems with his analysis.

5. 2. 1. 2 Problems with Jayaseelan’s Approach
Although Jayaseelan’s suggestion that Pseudogapping involves HDPS of a remnant outof VP undergoing deletion is very attractive and interesting, there are some problems that
his approach immediately faces. Some of the empirical problems have been pointed out
by Lasnik (1999). First, Lasnik pointed out that while the first object in a double object
construction can be a remnant in Pseudogapping, HDPS of the first object in the same
construction is impossible though the acceptability is judged as very subtle.

(17) a. ? John gave Bill a lot of money, and Mary will give Susan a lot of money.
b. *John gave t a lot of money the fund for the preservation of VOS languages.
(Lasnik (1999: 153-154))

On the contrary, the second object cannot occur as a Pseudogapping remnant, but HDPS ofthe direct object in a double object construction becomes fairly acceptable.

(18) a. *John gave Bill a lot of money, and Mary will give Bill a lot of advice.
b.

John gave Bill t yesterday more money than he had ever seen.
(Lasnik (1999: 154))

Jayaseelan’s analysis cannot explain correctly the grammaticality of (17a) and theungrammaticality of (19a).
173

Second, there are other facts related to verbs of “reanalysis.”

Although theungrammaticality of Jayaseelan’s examples in (13) is not entirely clear, verbs apparently
forming a strong constituent with a preposition (reanalyzed verbs) show different facts.
Lasnik pointed out, based on Levin (1979) that those verbs usually allow both
Pseudopassivization and Pseudogapping.

Compare (19) and (20) with (21) and (22).

The former involves a reanalyzed verbs while the latter involves a non-reanalyzed one.

(19) a.
b.

Bill was spoken to by John.
Bill spoke to Bill and Mary should Susan.

c. *John spoke to yesterday the man he met at the beach.
(20) a.
b.

Linguistics was talked about by John.
John talked about linguistics and Mary will philosophy.

c. *John talked about yesterday the man he met at the beach.
(21) a. *Bill was swum beside by John.
b. *John swam beside Bill, and Mary did Susan.
c. *John swam beside yesterday the man he met at the beach.
(22) a. *Bill was stood near by John.
b. *John stood near Bill, and Mary should Susan.
c. *John stood near yesterday the man he met at the beach.

As seen in (19) and (20), phrasal verbs such as speak to or talk to are likely to undergo
reanalysis and count as one unit, permitting Passivization and Pseudogapping, but theyusually disallow HDPS. As expected, on the other hand, non-analysis verbs as (21) and(22) do not permit any of them.6 Given these examples, I can conclude that other syntactic
relations than HDPS should involve Pseudogapping.7
If the discussion above is correct, we cannot adopt Jayaseelan’s HDPS approach as areasonable analysis of Pseudogapping, but Jayaseelan’s argument may not be that far off.
Recall that he assumes that the remnant of Pseudogapping invariably receives contrastive
stress (focus), and argues that (10B), repeated as (23), is unacceptable because the pronoun174

it cannot bear phonologically contrastive stress and undergo HDPS due to its innate property.
Looking more closely into (23), we can see that his analysis of (23) seems to befundamentally correct, but not exactly so.

(23) A:Is she suing the hospital?

B: *Yes, she is φ it.

(Jayaseelan (1990: 65))

Suppose that contrastive stress changes a light constituent into so heavy a one as to undergo
HDPS. Under this assumption, (23) would be accounted for in a different way. Althoughpronouns basically resist HDPS, a sentence with an HDP-Shifted pronoun will be rather
improved when the pronoun is phonologically accented or highly pitched as Jayaseelan
acknowledged. See (24).

(24) a. *Mary will date next Saturday you.
b. ? Mary will date next Saturday YOU.

In (24b), if the pronoun you is phonologically focused, it can undergo HDPS over the
adjunct phrase. Besides, pronouns can survive as a Pseudogapping remnant in a different
context as shown in (25).

(25) a.

Jackie will date me, and Maggie will you.

b. ?Jackie will date me, and Maggie will me, too.

(25a) improves when the remnant can be focused but when a phonological focus is notavailable in a context, the sentence becomes unacceptable.
Jayaseelan attributes the ungrammaticality of (23B) to the inability for the pronoun it tobear a phonological focus.

As Lasnik (1999) points out, however, the same situation

where the pronoun is replaced with the full DP is not acceptable, either.

175

(26) A:Is she suing the hospital?

B: *Yes, she is φ the hospital.

(Lasnik (1999: 154))

That is, as (26) shows, the context in (23) does not require the pronoun to be focused. Thus,
the ungrammaticality of (23) is not related with the inability for the pronoun it to be focusedand shifted. As a matter of fact, in a context such as (27), the pronoun it can bear aphonological focus.

(27) A: Oh, I forgot his name.
B: Brandon? Jeff? Steve?
A: No. Probably, something beginning with “D.”
B: Oh, Dice?
A: Yes! That’s IT!

This means that the focus itself is not applied to the pronoun in the situation of (23), and thatthe ungrammaticality of (23B) is not directly relevant to the lexical properties of it, but it
depends on the possibility of focusing on the element.
Therefore, it is hard to accept the analysis based on HDPS involving rightward movement,
but Jayaseelan’s analysis that remnants in Pseudogapping are focused or contrasted sheds
new light on this construction. In the next section, I examine another analysis by Lasnik(1999) based on Object Shift (OS).

5. 2. 2. 1 Lasnik (1999) -Object Shift ApproachArguing against Jayaseelan’s HDPS approach, but pursuing in part his core idea, Lasnik(1999) argues that Pseudogapping is derived by VP Deletion with a prior salvage operation,
namely, OS, to move remnants out of a VP domain to a Spec-Agro proposed by Koizumi(1993, 1995). Koizumi (1993, 1995) suggests the following finely articulated structure,
which is derivationally built up from the bottom.

A stage of derivation of a normaltransitive sentence is illustrated in (28), where Agrs has been merged to TP with the subject
176

base-generated in the higher Spec-VP.

(28) a. [AgrsP Agrs [TP T [VP DPSubj [V [AgroP Agro [VP V DPObj]]]]]]

With the structure above, Lasnik assumes that an object DP moves overtly up to the SpecAgroP by OS in the same way that a subject DP moves to the Spec-AgrsP. These two heads
Agrs and Agro are fundamentally the same and these instances of movement are assumed to
be induced by satisfaction of the EPP feature (in Chomsky’s term) on each head. The ideathat OS to the Spec-AgroP can be “the sought-after alternative to HDPS” is based on theobservation that Pseudogapping is basically better-formed with an accusative-marked object
as a remnant: for example, the direct object in a (simple) transitive construction (29), thefirst object in a double object construction (30), the object in a dative construction (31), theobject of a reanalyzed verb (32) or an exceptional case-marked subject (33).8 Relevant
examples in question, some of which are repeated, are given below.9(29) a.
b.

Mary hasn’t dated Bill, but she has dated Harry. (=2a)
It doesn’t bother Harry that Bill left, but it does bother me that Bill left.
(=2b)(30) a. ?John gave Bill a lot of money, and Mary will give Susan a lot of money.
(=17a)
b. *John gave Bill a lot of money, and Mary will give Bill a lot of advice.
(=18a)(31) a. ? John gave a lot of money to Bill, and Mary will give a lot of advice to Bill.
b. ?*John gave a lot of money to Bill, and Mary will give a lot of money to Susan.
(32) a.
b.

Bill spoke to Bill and Mary should speak to Susan. (=19b)
Bill was spoken to by John. (=19a)(33) a.

The DA proved Jones guilty and the Assistant DA will prove Smith guilty.

b.

I didn’t expect your mother to like the picture, but I did expect you to likethe picture.
177

Lasnik also assumes that the verb base-generated in the lower V-head bears a strong
feature, which must be checked in a higher head at a later stage of a derivation. Under thismechanism, the structure of the first clause of Pseudogapping like (29a) repeated as (34a) is
illustrated as (34b) with irrelevant details ignored for explanatory purposes.

(34b) isadapted from Lasnik (1999: 160).

(34) a. Mary hasn’t dated Bill, but she has Harry.
b.

AgrsP

Maryi

Agrs´

Agrs

TP

T

VP

hasn’t
ti

V´

V

AgroP

datedj [strong F]
Billk

Agro´

Agro

VP

tj
V

DP

tj

tk

In (34b), the object is raised to the Spec-AgroP out of the lower VP by the EPP feature on
the Agro after the θ-role has been discharged by the V-Head in the base position. The verb
dated head-moves to the higher V-Head through the Agro-Head and discharges the θ-role to178the subject. Then, the subject Mary moves to the Spec-AgrsP for the same reason as theobject. On the other hand, the structure of the second conjunct is illustrated as (35).

(35)

AgrsP

shei

Agrs´

Agrs

TP

T

VP

has
ti

V´

V

AgroP

Harryj

Agro

Agro´

VP

dated [strong F]

tj

VP Deletion

Just like (34b), the subject and the object are moved to the Spec-AgrsP and the Spec-AgroP,
respectively by the EPP feature. The θ-role of the object is discharged by the V-Headwithin the lowest VP. The verb remains in the base-generated position with the strong
feature unchecked.

Under Chomsky (1993), an unchecked strong feature will beillegitimate at the PF interface as an uninterpretable PF object.

However, since

Pseudogapping is derived by deleting VP at PF, the harmful feature on the V that would
179

otherwise cause a PF crash has been removed.10 Therefore, (34a) can come out.

5. 2. 2. 2 Problems with Lasnik’s Approach
Although Lasnik’s analysis based on OS provides promising insights into the nature of
Pseudogapping, there are some problems with his proposal, particularly with theapplicability of OS. As both Jayaseelan and Lasnik claim, remnants in Pseudogapping are
relatively semantically and phonologically contrasted or focused. In fact, the examples in(10) and (26), reproduced as (36) and (37), respectively, are not acceptable, where theremnants are not different from the corresponding element in the antecedent clause.

(36) A: Is she suing the hospital?
B: *Yes, she is φ it.

(Jayaseelan (1990: 65))(37) A: Is she suing the hospital?
B: *Yes, she is φ the hospital.

(Lasnik (1999: 154))

These examples show that remnants in Pseudogapping are semantically and phonologicallyfocused.

Under Lasnik’s analysis, it is unclear how this is guaranteed.

That is, themovement of an object in Pseudogapping to the Spec-AgroP seems to be the same as that intransitive constructions.
A second problem, partly related with the first one, is that it is not clarified well what
condition determines the applicability of deletion of Pseudogapping.

Since

Pseudogapping is another instance of elliptical phenomena, there should be a certain kindof condition on deletion as we have been assuming so far.
Furthermore, although Lasnik proposes an interesting account for Pseudogapping
involving a double object construction and a dative construction, there is a problem withassignment of a θ-role to each argument. To see this, let us take (17) and (31), repeated as(38) and (39), respectively. According to Lasnik, these examples are really subtle in theirgrammaticality, but there exists a slight contrast in each pair.
180

(38) a. ? John gave Bill a lot of money, and Mary will give Susan a lot of money.
b. *John gave Bill a lot of money, and Mary will give Bill a lot of advice.
(39) a. ?John gave a lot of money to Bill, and Mary will give a lot of advice to Bill.
b. ?*John gave a lot of money to Bill, and Mary will give a lot of money to Susan.

In both cases, Pseudogapping with the first object as a remnant is judged to be slightly better
than the other.

Although there are some arguments against Lasnik’s analysis (Larson(1988)), Lasnik assumes, based on binding phenomena observed by Barss and Lasnik(1986), that in a double object construction, the first object is base-generated in a higher
position than the second one.

Besides, it is assumed that a direct object in a dative

construction is originated in a higher position than a dative phrase.11 Under his assumption,
the structure of a double object construction is the same as that of a dative construction andthe structure is illustrated in (40), where the dative phrase in the dative construction isrepresented as PP. The structure below is adapted from Lasnik (1999: 165-169).

181

(40) Double Object / Dative Construction
AgrP1

Subj.i

Agr1´

Agr1

TP

T

VP1

ti

V´

V1

AgrP2

The 1st Obj./Direct Obj.jAgr2´
VP Deletion

Agr2

VP2

tj

V2´

V2

AgrP3

The 2nd Obj./PPk

Agr3´

Agr3

VP3

V-Head182

tk

Utilizing this srtructure, Lasnik attempts to explain (38) and (39). Let us see the improved
examples of (38a) and (39a), represented as (41a) and (42b), respectively.

(41) a. ?John gave Bill a lot of money, and Mary will give Susan a lot of money.
b. ?John gave a lot of money to Bill, and Mary will give a lot of advice to Bill.

In (40), the first object in a double object construction and the direct object in the dative
construction are assumed to be located in a higher position than the second object and thedative phrase, respectively. Thus, the Relativized Minimality evacuates the higher one to
the AgrP2 out of the VP2 which is supposed to be deleted. As a result, the sentences in (41)can both be derived correctly.
On the other hand, in the degraded examples of (38b) and (39b), reproduced as (42a) and(42b), the second object and the dative phrase are base-generated below the first object andthe direct object, respectively.

(42) a. *John gave Bill a lot of money, and Mary will give Bill a lot of advice.
b. ?*John gave a lot of money to Bill, and Mary will give a lot of money to Susan.

The lower element is not allowed to move across the first element to the AgroP2 by theRelativized Minimality. Thus, it cannot escape from the elliptical site, the VP2, and as aresult, (42) are ruled out.
Lasnik extends his proposal to explain Jayaseelan’s example (15), repeated as (43).

(43) *I didn’t give a dime to Mary, but I did φ a nickel to Jane.

Under Lasnik’s assumption, in a normal dative construction such as (44), the head verb giveraises to the V1 via the Agr3, V2, and Agr2.

(44) I gave a nickel to Jane.
183

On the way to V1, give with three θ-roles gets them discharged to the first object, the second
object and the subject.

However, in (43), even though two complements are raised

somehow from their original position to a higher position than VP2, only one complement
to Jane is assigned a θ-role and the other object and the subject are not assigned the θ-rolebecause the head verb is deleted in the original position. Therefore, (43) is judged asdegraded. According to Lasnik, this is why Pseudogapping itself, including (38) and (39)is “somewhat degraded.” If the account here is correct, however, it is still unclear why a
lot of speakers judge Pseudogapping as acceptable and interpret it as an intended meaning.
In addition, it must be answered why the first object in a double object construction and theobject in a dative construction can be a remnant in a Pseudogapping construction although
they are not perfectly acceptable.
As discussed in this section, although the accounts provided by Jayaseelan and Lasnik areboth appealing and tempting, it is necessary to pursue another possibility because there aresome problems with their analyses as pointed above. In the next section, building on the
Parallelism and Maximal Effect of Deletion I have proposed in the previous chapters andextending Chomsky’s (2000) idea on a peripheral (P-) feature, I would like to explore
another account within the minimalist framework, specifically Chomsky (2001).

5. 3 How Is Pseudogapping Derived?
In this section, I would like to propose an alternative analysis of derivation of
Pseudogapping. Even in the face of some problems that we have seen with the arguments
by Jayaseelan and Lasnik, their fundamental insights appear to be on the right track. Thus,
I assume that remnants in Pseudogapping are contrastively semantically and phonologicallyfocused. In addition, considering that when the first object in a double object construction
and the direct object in a dative construction left as a remnant in Pseudogapping, theirsentences are slightly better than when the second object and the dative phrase are undeleted
in each construction, Lasnik’s core idea on OS of a remnant seems to be attractive.
Therefore, it is necessary to yield to the temptation of the OS approach, and I would like topursue this line of explanation.
184

Extending Chomsky’s (2001) argument, I propose that a remnant constituent in
Pseudogapping can be treated like a focus-marked phrase in non-OS languages. I also
claim that a Pseudogapping remnant remains in situ, a base-generated position, probed by
φ-features and a Peripheral (P-) feature as a sort of Focus assigner on the v*-Head and thatthe remnant is spelled out in situ because no new outcome is created due to deletion. Then,
I argue that applying the LF structural Parallelism and Maximal Effect of Deletion to a v*P
constituent will result in deriving a final string of Pseudogapping.

5. 3. 1 Object Shift in English?
Before analyzing Pseudogapping, let us see some of the properties of OS discussed in
Chomsky (2001). As is well known, in Icelandic or Mainland Scandinavian, when a direct
object bears a complex interpretation such as specificity-definiteness, focus, or topic, asyntactic operation of OS is applied to the object, which is shifted to a Spec-v*P position,
where an interpretive complex Int is assigned to the object. This movement is induced by
the optional EPP feature (the Edge feature in this paper) on the v*-Head with a prior φfeature agreement between the v*-Head and the object. A certain point of its derivation isroughly illustrated as (45a), where the object receives Int at the edge (EPP) position of thev*P. In Icelandic or Mainland Scandinavian, a V-Head is supposed to be raised to a T- or
C-Head via a v*-Head. If an object stays in situ, there will be no phonological element left
above the object in the v*P as shown in (45b).

(45) a.

[TP Subjecti T [v*P Objectj [ti v* [VP V tj ]]]]b.

[TP Subjecti T-Vj [v*P [ti v*-tj [VP tj Object]]]]According to Chomsky, a position not commanded by any phonological elements in a phaseas (45b) is considered to be “the phonological boarder,” and OS languages observe theparametric rule (46) while non-OS languages do not.

185

(46) a.

At the phonological boarder of v*P, XP is assigned Int´.
(Chomsky (2001: 34))b.

The Phonological Boarder
In [HP Spec [ H XP]], XP is at a phonological boarder if there is nophonological element in the H-Head and the Spec of HP.

In (46a), “Int´” means a non-complex interpretation unlike Int´ for topic or focus. Buildingon this, Chomsky (2001) proposed the following principles.

(47) a.

v* is assigned an EPP-feature only if that has an effect on outcome.

b.

The EPP position of v* is assigned Int.

c.

At the phonological boarder of v*P, XP is assigned Int´. (=46a)(Chomsky (2001: 35))

Take the EPP feature in (47) as the same as the EDGE feature in this paper. (47a) and(47b) are invariant in all languages, but (47c) is applied only to OS languages such as
Icelandic. In OS languages where a V-Head is raised higher than a v*P, when an object
requires Int such as specificity or focus, it must be shifted to the v*P because the object
receives Int´ in the complement position and yields extreme deviance. Likewise, if an Int´requiring object is moved to the position, the same result would come out due to mismatchin the meaning.
On the other hand, non-OS languages such as English do not observe (47c). Thus, theassignment of Int or Int´ for interpretation is free in the object position. Since the Int-Int´
distinction is available in situ in non-OS languages, movement to a v*P is only induced whensome new outcome other than this Int-Int´ assignment is expected.12 Note that under thephase impenetrability condition (PIC) proposed by Chomsky (2000), a phase is evaluatedat the next higher strong phase. Thus, if we keep to this PIC, it is unknown whether theassignment of Int-Int´ is completed at a v*P, which counts as a unit of PF/LF integrity which
denotes proposition.
186

5. 3. 2 P-Feature
Under the mechanism of (47), however, a salient semantic outcome like focus or topic is
not necessarily guaranteed because the Int-Int´ assignment is assumed to be free in English.
Besides, it is hard to tell whether a new syntactic outcome is actually yielded by moving a
direct object in a Pseudogapping context because the relevant v*P is gone. Therefore,
extending Chomsky’s (2000) argument, suppose that an optional feature, a “Peripheral (P-)”
feature, is assigned to a remnant constituent in Pseudogapping. According to Chomsky(2000: 108-110), in addition to φ-features (agreement features for Case), a phase head canhave a P-feature of the peripheral (discourse-related) system such as force, topic, focus andso on.

Building on this assumption, suppose further that just like the φ-/Case feature

relation, there is a P-/Focus relation in a probe-goal relation, where the uninterpretable Pfeature [-P] on a phase-head is valued by an interpretable P-feature on a focus element [+P],
and as a by-product, [-Int] on the relevant element is valued as [+INT] as a focus
interpretation. Under this system, a remnant in Pseudogapping is expected to receive a
focus interpretation without movement to a v*P.

5. 3. 3 An Analysis
We have seen that although the proposals by Jayaseelan and Lasnik are very interesting,they both focus on how an elided site for Pseudogapping is created by moving remnants.
Examining their analyses empirically and theoretically, I have pointed out that their analyses
include some problems and thus, it is necessary to clarify how Pseudogapping is derived.
Therefore, in this section, I would like to propose an alternative analysis of derivation of
Pseudogapping under the mechanism I am proposing here.
Let us first take a basic Pseudogapping example with a simple direct object as (2a),repeated as (48). I assume, following Jayaseelan (1990) and Lasnik (1999), that a deletion
operation for Pseudogapping is applied to a v*P, where the V-Head is not overtly raised.

(48) Mary hasn’t dated Bill, but she has φ Harry. (φ = dated)187

Suppose that the derivation of the second conjunct has reached the stage of (49), where v*P
is completed.

(49) [v*P she [v*´ v [VP dated Harry]]]]If φ-features and P-feature both are assigned to the relevant items, the structure is illustrated
as (50).

(50)

v*P

she

v*´

v*
Probe

VP

[-φ, -P]
dated

Harry
Goal

[+φ, -Case][+P, -INT]In the structure (50), the uninterpretable φ- and P- features seek the matching goal Harryin its c-commanding domain. After Agree, the uninterpretable features on the object arevalued and the valuation makes the uninterpretable [-Case] and [-INT] on the goal theinterpretable [+Case] and [+INT]. The same procedure holds for the first conjunct, too
because the element corresponding to the remnant DP is also contrastively focused. Under
the valuation system based on probe-goal, all the uninterpretable features get valued at thev*P as represented in (51).

(51) Mary hasn’t dated Bill, but she has φ Harry. (φ = dated)
Antecedent v*P: [v*P Mary [v*´ v*(-φ, +P)[F] [VP dated Bill ((+φ, +Case), (+P, -+NT))[F]]]]
Elided v*P:

[v*P she[v*´ v*(-φ, +P)[F] [VP dated Harry ((+φ,+-Case), (+P,+-INT))[F]]]]
188

However, under the PIC assumed here, phases are evaluated at the next higher phase. Thus,
each v*P is evaluated after the subsequent derivation of the merger of T (and C) to the v*Pin (51).

Therefore, the LF Structural Parallelism and Maximal Effect of Deletion,

reproduced in (52), are not applied to the v*P yet.

(52) a. LF Structural Parallelism
Phonological deletion is licensed only if the LF structure of a category that
contains elided material is structurally isomorphic to that of the antecedent.
b. Maximal Effect of Deletion
Delete elements marked as [Presupposed] except focus marked [F] elements.

If a derivation proceeds phase by phase, it is natural to assume that (52) should be appliedin accordance with the PIC.
Suppose that the semantics in the antecedent v*P serves as a presupposed proposition for
the elided clause. In fact, the antecedent v*P denotes that there is at least an event where
there are specific persons involved. More specifically, there is an event of a specific person(x) who loves a different specific person (y) as roughly shown in (53). The trace of aconstituent could also count as a focus-marked material just like other focus elements(Schwarzschild (1999), Merchant (2001), Gengel (2013) among others). Thus, the traceof a subject in the Spec-v*P must also be bound by an operator like (53b).

(53) a.
b.

[λy: y ∋ De [λx: x ∋ De. x dated y ]](x: she, y: Bill)∃<x, y> [x dated y]Given the PIC and the presupposition denoted by the antecedent clause (53), the second
clause can be represented as (54), where the v*P is marked as [Presupposed].

(54) [CP C [TP shei [T´ T [v*P ti [v*´ v*(-φ, +P)[F] [VP dated Harry ((+φ, +Case), (+P, +INT))[F]]]]]]][Presupposed]189

On the hand, the LF structure of the first conjunct is illustrated in (55).

(55) [CP C [TP Maryi [T´ T [v*P ti [v*´ v*(-φ, +P)[F] [VP dated Bill((+φ, +Case), (+P, +INT))[F]]]]]]]

When the C-Head is merged, we can see that the v*P in (54) has the structure identical tothat in (55), sharing the identical feature dependency.

Then, the Maximal Effect ofDeletion forces elements except [F]-marked elements to be deleted. As a result, (51) is
derived without moving the remnant out of the deletion site.
Notice that the ungrammaticality of (37), reproduced as (56), can also be explained in asimilar way.

(56)

A:

Is she suing the hospital?

B: *Yes, she is φ the hospital.

In (56), the object in the second conjunct is the same as the corresponding object in the first
conjunct.

Thus, it doesn’t have to be contrastively focused, and the P-feature is not

assigned to it. Since the P-feature is not available, each v*P structure is shown as (57).

(57) Antecedent v*P:

[v*P she [v*´ v*(-φ) [VP suing the hospital (+φ, -Case)]]Elided v*P:

[v*P she [v*´ v*(-φ) [VP suing the hospital (+φ, -Case)]]After the higher Heads are merged to the v*P, the LF structure of the second conjunct will
be like (58).

(58)[CP C [TP shei T-is [v*P ti [v*´ v*(+φ) [VP suing the hospital (+φ, +Case)]]]]][Presupposed]

Under the assumptions, the object the hospital will also count as a target of deletion, which
has to be deleted at PF as (59).

190

(59) Yes, [TP shei T-is [v*P ti [v*´ v*(+φ) [VP suing the hospital (+φ, +Case)]]]][Presupposed]

As (59), all the overlapped parts deleted and therefore (60B) comes out.

(60) A: Is she suing the hospital?
B: Yes, she is.

Likewise, (36), where the pronoun refers to the same thing, is ruled out for the same reasons.
The analysis that I have proposed here can explain the (un)grammaticality of (61) and(62), in which the verb is not reanalyzed with the following preposition as an instance oftransitive verbs. The impossibility of passivization with these verb phrases (63) indicatesthat the preposition is structurally separated from the verb, forming a stronger constituent
with the following noun phrase.

(61) a. *John swam beside Bill, and Mary did Susan. (=21b)b. ? John swam beside Bill, and Mary did beside Susan. (Lasnik (1999: 163))(62) a. *John stood near Bill, and Mary should Susan. (=22b)
b. ?John stood near Bill, and Mary should near Susan.

(Lasnik (1999: 163))(63) a. *Bill was swum beside by John. (= 21a)b. *Bill was stood near by John.

(= 22a)Suppose that the PP is separated from the verb and it serves not as an argument of the verb,
but as an adjunct phrase. Thus, let us assume that the PP in this case does not have the φfeatures which would be otherwise related to an object, but the PP itself has only theuninterpretable P-feature. This assumption is supported by the examples (63) and (64),where the PP is moved across the adverbial phrase while the DP in the PP cannot. (See
Lasnik (1999: 163) and Levin (1976)).

(64) a.

Mary will swim [beside Susan] tomorrow.
191

b.

Mary will swim ti tomorrow [beside Susan]i.

c. *Mary will swim beside ti tomorrow [the man she met at the beach]i.
(65) a.
b.

Mary stood [near Bill] yesterday.
Mary stood ti yesterday [near Bill]i.

c. *Mary stood near ti yesterday [the man she met at the beach]i.

If a movement operation is induced by a feature agreement under a probe-goal relation andthe EDGE (EPP) feature on the attracting head, it is possible to assume that the v*-Head andthe PP share the P-features as the agreeing features to create (64) and (65). The initialstructure of the v*P of the second conjunct in (61a), for example, is illustrated like (66), in
which the PP functions as a single focus adjunct because of its strong cohesion.

(66)

v*P

Mary

v*´

v*
Probe

VP

[-P]
V
swim

PP
beside Susan[+P, -INT]

Goal

Under this assumption, (64b) and (65b) are derived as shown below. Let us take (43b), forexample, the v*P in which is represented as (67).

(67) a.
b.

[v*P Mary [v*´[v*(+P, EPP) [VP swim [PP beside Susan (+P, +INT)][F]]] tomorrow]][v*P Mary [v*´[v*´[v*(+P, EPP) [VP swim ti]] tomorrow] [beside Susan (+P, +INT)]i[F]]]In (67a), the uninterpretable [-P] on the v*-Head is valued by the interpretable [+P] on the192

PP beside Susan. The EDGE (EPP) feature is assigned because it creates a new outcomeof the PP crossing the adverbial phrase. Then, as shown in (67b), the PP is moved by the
P-feature agreement and the EDGE (EPP) feature. Note that I am assuming here that thismovement is rightward only for explanatory purposes. See the note 7.
Under this mechanism, consider how (60) and (61) are derive. Let us take (60), forexample. The structure of each conjunct in (60) is illustrated like (68).

(68) The first conjunct:[TP Johni T [v*P ti [v*´ v*(+P) [VP swim [PP beside Bill(+P, +INT)][F]]]]The second conjunct:[TP Maryi T [vP* ti [v*´ v*(+P) [VP swim [PP beside Susan (+P, +INT)][F]]]]][Presupposed]

In (68), the PP as a single unit is focus-marked as the result of the P-feature agreement withthe v*-Head.

The agreement relation is structurally identical between both conjuncts.

Thus, the structures in (68) satisfies the LF structural parallelism.

Then, under the

Maximal Effect of Deletion, the presupposed elements undergo deletion while the Intmarked PP, namely, the focus-marked PP is left intact because the PP serves as one focus
phrase. In this way, (61b) and (62b) are derived while (61a) and (61b) are ruled out.
Now, let us turn to the ungrammaticality of (43), repeated as (69).

(69) *I didn’t give a dime to Mary, but I did φ a nickel to Jane.

Recall that while Jayaseelan attempts to explain the ungrammaticality of (69) in terms of
Double Adjunct Constraint based on HDPS, Lasnik attributes it to the failure of the θfeatures on the V-Head to be discharged to the subject and first object in the second conjunct.
Basically following Lasnik (1999), I assume that a double object construction and a dative
construction have the same structure. Instead of the articulated Agr system advocated by
Koizumi (1993, 1995), I speculate that a v*-Head in a double object construction has φfeatures that value the Case features of the direct object and indirect object while a v*-Head193

in a dative construction also has φ-features that value the Case feature of the first object andlicense the dative phrase as legitimate because those two elements are arguments for theverb. Thus, I assume a double object construction and a dative construction share thestructure illustrated in (70).

(70)

v*P

Subj.

v*´

v*

VP

[-φ]
The 1st Obj. / Obj. DP

V´

[+φ]
V

The 2nd obj./ Dative Phrase[+φ]I assume that in a normal double object construction based on the structure (70), the V-Headrises to the v*-Head, extending the minimal domain of the V to the v*P, making the firstobject and the second object equi-distant from the v*-Head. As a result, the Cases of thetwo objects below the v*-Head are valued under the probe-goal relation. The similar thingholds true for an object DP and a dative phrase in a dative construction. In a similar way,
if the first object and the dative phrase match with the φ-features on the v*-Head, the Caseof the first object is valued, and the dative phrase is licensed as one of the arguments in a
dative construction.
Under these assumptions, the ungrammaticality of (69) can be attributed to the unvalued
features of the second element. Suppose that the remnants generated under the v*-Head in(68) could be focus-marked with P-features assigned. Under the mechanism above, thev*P structure in the second conjunct of the dative construction (69) is illustrated as (71),where the relevant features have been assigned.
194

(71)

v*P

Subj.

v*´

v*

VP

[-φ, -P]a nickelV´[(+φ, -Case),(+P, -Int)]VPP
to Jane[(+φ, -legitimate), (+P, -Int)]

In (71), the direct object and the dative phrase have the feature set that consists of φ-features
and P-features.

The v*-Head as a probe tries to seek its matching goal in the c-commanding domain to be valued. However, the V-Head is not raised to the v*-Head in
Pseudogapping as claimed by Lasnik (1999). Therefore, under the Minimality Condition,roughly defined in (72), the v*-Head first matches the direct object a nickel and its
uninterpretable features are valued at this point, making the [-Case] and [-INT] interpretable.

(72) Minimality Condition
α is closer to H than β in [ H [… α … β …]] if and only if α c-commands β.

Valuing the first object will create the Defective Intervention Effect for the second object(Chomsky 2000). Suppose that when β and Γ in (73) can match the probe head α, if β isvalued and thus inactive, Γ doesn’t enter into a matching relation with α.

(73) α > β > Γ( > = c-command)

Under this constraint, the dative phrase below the direct object whose uninterpretable
195

features are valued is not accessible to the v*-Head in (74).

(74) [v*P I [v*(+φ, +P)[[a nickel (+φ, +-Case), (+P, +INT))][F][ give [[to Jane] ((+φ, -Case), (+P, -INT))]]]]][Presupposed]

In (74), the second element is left with its uninterpretable features [-Case] and [-Int]
unvalued. As a result, the second remnant is not properly interpreted at LF. Moreover,it should be phonologically erased under the assumptions because it is not focus-marked.
Thus, (68) is derived as unacceptable.14

5. 3. 4 A Remaining Issue - Degraded, but Somewhat acceptable? In this section, let us turn to (30) and (31) judged to be marginally acceptable. The
examples in questions are reproduced below as (75) and (76).

(75) a. ?John gave Bill a lot of money, and Mary will give Susan a lot of money.
b. *John gave Bill a lot of money, and Mary will give Bill a lot of advice.
(76) a. ?John gave a lot of money to Bill, and Mary will give a lot of advice to Bill.
b. ?*John gave a lot of money to Bill, and Mary will give a lot of money to Susan.

Recall that Pseudogapping involving a double object construction will be slightly better
when the first object is left as a remnant.

Likewise, in Pseudogapping with a dative

construction, the direct object DP becomes a more acceptable remnant than the dative phrase.
The grammatical differences observed between the examples above are not crystal clear, but
the contrasts are more or less found by some speakers. With the structure (70), I would
like to provide a possible account of the differences.
Take the degraded examples (75b) and (76b). If φ-features and P-features are assigned
to the relevant elements, the v*P of the second conjunct in each construction will be like
(77).

(77) a. [v*P Mary [v*(-φ, -P) [VP Bill((+φ, -Case) [ give [[a lot of advice] ((+φ, -Case), (+P, -INT))]]]]
196

b. [v*P Mary [v*(-φ, -P) [VP a lot of money ((+φ, -Case)) [give [[to Susan]((+ φ, -legitimate), (+P, -INT))]]]]]]

Under the probe-goal relation, the φ-features and P-feature on the probe v* seek the closest
matching goal. In (76), there is a possible matching goal Bill and a lot of money in theclosest c-commanded position from the v*-Head in (77a) and (77b), respectively.
However, while the goal has only the φ-features, the probe has another uninterpretablefeature, the P-feature. Extending Chomsky’s (2001) idea on a maximize matching effectdefined below, I assume that deleting more uninterpretable features at one time is preferredthan deleting fewer features.15(78) Maximize Matching Effect (Chomsky (2001: 15))
[U]ninterpretable features must be eliminated at once as fully as possible; partial
elimination of features under Match, followed by elimination of the residue undermore remote Match, is not an option.

The probe overrides the first matching goal and the deeper search is carried out to value
more features because the Syntax based on bottom-up structure building knows that thesecond goal in a lower position has more features than the first goal. That is, since the firstmatching goal only has [-Case] with its φ-features, the probe with the additional P-features
goes over it and reaches for the second goal a lot of advice and to Susan in (77a) and (77b),
respectively. However, not only does this valuation need a kind of deeper search, which
imposes load on computation, but also the Case feature of the first object Bill and the object
DP a lot of money are left unvalued as shown in (79a) and (79b), respectively.

(79) a. [v*P Mary [v*(+φ, +P) [VP Bill(+φ, -Case) [ give [[a lot of advice] ((+φ, +Case), (+P, +INT))][F]]]]]][Presupposed]b. [v*P Mary [v*(+φ, +P) [VP a lot of money ((+φ, -Case)) [give [[to Susan]((+ φ, +legitimate), (+P, +INT))][F]]]]]][Presupposed]This results in deriving the less acceptable sentences (75b) and (76b).
197

Next, let us consider how the slightly improved sentences (75a) and (76a) will come out.
Adopting the structure (70) and the focus marking by the P-feature, the v*P of the second
conjunct in each construction can be represented as (80).

(80) a. [v*P Mary [v*(-φ, -P) [VP Susan((+φ, -Case), (+P, -INT)) [give [a lot of money] (+φ, -Case) ]]]]
b. [v*P Mary [v*(-φ, -P) [a lot of advice]((+ φ, -Case), (+P, -INT)) [ give [[to Bill] ((+φ, -legitimate))]]]]In (80), the first c-commanding constituent has both of the uninterpretable features unlike(77). The probe features on the v*-Head in each structure can get themselves valued by
the closest matching goal Susan in (80a) and a lot of advice in (80b), and it doesn’t have to
conduct the deeper search requiring some extra loads unlike (79). The requirement for theprobe to value its uninterpretable features is satisfied easily and quickly by the first matchinggoal and the deeper search by the probe is not carried out. Then, the parallelism andMaximal Effect of Deletion proposed here are applied to the structures in (81) where theand the presupposed elements will be deleted. However, although the probe can get valued
easily without deeper search, the features of the second element are still unvalued.

(81) a. [v*P Mary [v*(+φ, +P) [VP [Susan((+φ, +Case), (+P, +INT))][F] [ give [[a lot of money] (+φ, -Case) ]]]]][Presupposed]b. [v*P Mary [v*(+φ, +P) [VP [a lot of advice]((+ φ, +Case), (+P, +INT))][F] [give [[to Bill]((+φ, -legitimate))]]]]][Presupposed]

Therefore, the slightly better, but still degraded result will come out with the relevant
elements deleted under the LF structural parallelism and the Maximal Effect of Deletion.
These cases also show that non-constituent deletion is involved with deriving
Pseudogapping.

5. 4 Conclusion
In this chapter, I explore an alternative account of the derivation of Pseudogapping.
Adopting the proposals I made for SS and MS: the LF structural parallelism and the198Maximal Effect of Deletion, I have claimed that a remnant in Pseudogapping does notundergo movement, but it is focus-marked in situ through valuation by a P-feature (Focus)
on a v*-Head and that the parallelism and the effect on a deletion operation yield an eventual
Pseudogapping construction.

I also argued that in this valuation system, the slightdifferences in the acceptability of double object constructions and dative constructions
involving Pseudogapping are also explained. The claim here provides another argument
against the conventional assumption that a deletion operation is applied to a constituent or
maximal projection and presents a new possibility that partial elements in a maximal
projection can be deleted.

Notes for Chapter 5* This chapter is a revised and extended version of the paper that appeared as “A Minimalist
Approach to Pseudogapping,” in Kinki (Kindai) University Department of Language
Education Bulletin, Vol. 8, No.2, pp. 75-92.

1. According to Jackendoff (1971), Pseudogapping is judge as ungrammatical. In fact,
these examples are not observed so frequently, but a lot of informants admit that they are
more or less acceptable and grammatical like MS discussed in the previous chapter.
2. I am assuming that the PF Deletion approach is on the right track. As (2c) and (3c) show,even though a target sentence including deletion is not in a single clause with its antecedent,
deletion is still allowed as long as relevant parts are overtly indicated in the given utterance
or context.

Following Hankamer and Sag (1976), I assume that Gapping and

Pseudogapping also involve PF Deletion. Williams (1977) argues, against Hankamer andSag’s analysis, that Gapping is not possible when relevant speeches are not in a single
sentence. However, a lot of problems are pointed out with his analysis (see Lobeck (1995),
Shima (2015) among others) as discussed in Chapter 2. Since deletion in Gapping and
Pseudogapping is permitted when an elided part is overtly present in its relevant context, thePF Deletion approach is also applicable to this construction. For discussion, see Hankamer
and Sag (1976) and Chapter 2 in this paper.
199

3. In Jayaseelan (1990), NP is used to refer to an noun phrase, instead of DP. Thus, hetakes movement of heavy elements as Heavy NP Shift. Following the current framework,
I use DP and Heavy DP Shift (HDPS) to mean these terms.
4. Levin (1978) notes that adjectives cannot survive deletion in Pseudogapping, but nounphrases can be survivors from ellipsis. For more examples, see Levin (1978).
(i) a. *Rona {looked/sounded} annoyed, and Sue did frustrated.
b.

A: These leeks {look/smell/taste} terrible.
B: *Your steak will better. / *The onion rings do even worse.

c. *The watchdog {appeared/seemed/turned out} (to be) friendly, but the housedog did ferocious.

(Levin (1978: 233))

In (i), when the remnants are adjectives, the examples including them are ungrammatical.
5. For more details to support the assumption that the constituent corresponding to theremnant can undergo covert movement, see Jayaseelan (1990: 72-73).
6. Lasnik’s examples here are based on Levin (1986). See Levin (1986) for further details
on reanalysis verbs.
7. The HDPS approach may also become problematic in terms of a linear ordering of rightadjoined phrases, as is discussed by Kayne (1994).

Kayne’s “Linear Corresponding

Axiom (LCA)” rejects a instance of rightward movement and suggests that a typical ccommand relation should determine linear precedence relation.

If this is correct, it isunclear how rightward movement of HDPS will be able to spell out a word order correctly.
Thus, it may also be necessary to examine whether rightward HDPS itself is possible as an
instance of movement. Given the LCA, it is not likely that even a focus constituent can be
moved rightward to be adjoined to VP.
8. Lasnik notes that it is not clear enough why (13b), repeated as (ia), is degraded while theinstance of Pseudopassive (ib) with the same phrasal verb is fairly acceptable.
(i) a. *You can’t count on a stranger; but you can a friend. (=13b)b.

A total stranger was counted on for support.

(Lasnik (1999: 157))

Levin (1979/1986) suggests that Pseudogapping with a reanalysis verb is better when the
preposition forms a constituent with the verb, not with the NP. Thus, the ungrammaticality200of (ia) may be related to a possibility that the preposition forms a constituent with thefollowing noun phrase, not with the verb.
9. As noted in the note 4, adjectives cannot be remnants of Pseudogapping. This fact also
supports Lasnik’s argument. See the note 4 for the examples.
10. Following Chomsky (1994), Lasnik further assumes that even though a VP constituent
is deleted, all elements in the projection will be moved to each relevant position at LF inorder to delete the other features that would cause a LF crash.
11. The argument that the first object in the double object construction is structurally higher
than the second one comes from the following examples involving binding relation.
(i)a.

I showed Johni/himi to himselfi (in the mirror).

b. *I showed himselfi to Johni (in the mirror).
(ii)*I showed himselfi Johni (in the mirror).

(iii) a.

I showed the professors each other’s students.

b. *I showed each other’s students the professors.
(Barass and Lasnik (1986: 347))
Given the binding principle (Chomsky (1981)), we can assume that the first object is
structurally higher than the second object.

For more examples, see Barss and Lasnik(1986).
12. One of the possible instances of movement to the v*P in non-OS languages is successive
A´-movement. See Chomsky (2000, 2001) for details.
13. If the PIC is checked at the next strong phase, as Chomsky (2001: 14) assumes, the phaseevaluation of v*P is supposed to be induced when the next phase head C is merged. Thus,
deletion is also applied at this level. If so, the subject, originated in the Spec-v*P, will not
be present in the position. The subject will have moved out of the v*P when the v*Pundergoes deletion. This may not be a crucial problem even under a stricter version of the
PIC, in which a phase is evaluated when it is completed, because only the complement of
the phase head will be spelled out and the subject still exists in the syntax.
14. The ungrammaticality may be attributed to a different reason that if the LF structuralparallelism and the following deletion operation based on the Maximal Effect of Deletion
201

were applied only to legitimate constituents spelled out from the Syntax, the second conjunctin (69) could not even become a possible candidate to undergo deletion.

Another

explanation would be that the way of valuing the features in the second conjunct is different
from that in the first conjunct due to the inapplicability of the verb raising. This would
make the LF structural parallelism unsatisfied. Thus, from these regards, too, it would also
be possible to conclude that the derivation of the second conjunct in (69) crushes andPseudogapping is blocked.
15. Given Chomsky’s (2001) discussion, it may be possible that an uninterpretable feature
on an intermediate element is valued and the probe can still search for another element withother uninterpretable features in a lower position. Here, extending (78), I assume that asearch goes over an intermediate element.

202

Chapter 6
Conclusion
In this paper, I have dealt with some empirical phenomena involving deletion under theStrong Minimalist Theme (Chomsky (2000)) that language is an optimal solution tointerface conditions of PF and LF. Among the phenomena, I have explored an alternative
derivation of elliptical phenomena: Single Sluicing (SS), Multiple Sluicing (MS), andPseudogapping, in which some elements are left undeleted.

Traditionally, it has been

assumed that a deletion operation is applied to a phonological constituent or maximal
projection. Thus, it has been a focus of study how elliptical constructions with remnants
are derived.

In this paper, against the conventional assumption, I have argued thatremnants in these constructions do not undergo movement, but they are bound by the Qmorpheme based on Baker (1970) or given an appropriate interpretation by a certain feature[P-feature] in a structure. Based on this, I have presented two proposals with respect to a
derivation of these constructions as below.

LF Structural Parallelism
Phonological deletion is licensed only if the LF structure of a category that contains
elided material is structurally isomorphic to that of the antecedent.

Maximal Effect of Deletion
Delete elements marked as [Presupposed] except focus marked [F] elements.

Extending Baker’s Q-morpheme, I have argued that it has properties of binding a remote
wh-phrase in situ, but the English Q-morpheme is different from the Japanese one in that theformer requires one wh-phrase to be phonologically adjacent to it. In English case, therequirement is satisfied by movement to a Spec-CP or a Spec-TP for a subject wh-phrase,203

or deleting relevant constituents between the morpheme and a wh-phrase under certain
conditions.

Under the Maximal Effect of Deletion, wh-phrases in SS and MS do notundergo deletion. An antecedent clause in SS and MS presupposes that there should besomething/somebody involved in the preceding event. Its corresponding wh-remnant alsofunctions as an indeterminate element just like an indefinite noun phrase in the antecedent,
bound by the Q-morpheme. Since they are different from each other in this respect, theformer is focus-marked, escaping from deletion.

An important consequence of thisanalysis is that the island insensitivity of Sluicing is easily explained, though the previous
analyses have more or less assumed that a wh-phase moves across islands, violating someversion of island conditions, which is repaired by deletion. Under this analysis, violation
repair is not real or promising.

Another consequence of this analysis is that the(im-)possibility of VP deletion involving Sluicing is also explained; the auxiliary must be
deleted along with other materials while it should be left intact when phonologically or
semantically focused.
I have also proposed a possible derivation of MS, where multiple, normally two whphrases, remain undeleted like a Sluicing construction. Since in English only one whphrase is allowed to be moved to Spec-CP, it has been unclear how a deletion operation isapplied to derive MS under a conventional assumption that deletion would be applied to a
constituent. However, under the mechanism of the LF structural parallelism and Maximal
Effect of Deletion given above, the derivation of multiple sluicing can be also treated on parwith SS. Furthermore, it was suggested that the clause-mateness of multiple sluicing is
attributed to the properties of the second wh-remnant in MS. Looking closely into somepeculiar facts of the second wh-phrase in the construction, it turns out that the second whremnant in MS is relatively phonologically focused, behaves like a strong quantifier every.
By assuming that the second wh-phrase is bound by the Q-morpheme just like the way thestrong quantifier is bound, I have suggested that the properties of MS are also explained
under the proposed assumptions.
Furthermore, I have dealt with the derivation of pseudogapping under the LF structuralparallelism and Maximal Effect of Deletion.
204

Following Chomsky (2000), a remnant

object is marked as a focus element in situ by a peripheral [P-] feature, which could beaccompanied with φ-features on a v*-Head. Since no new stylistic change comes out due
to deletion, the EPP feature is not assigned to the v*-Head. This makes the focus elementin the construction unmoved. The proposed parallelism is checked against v*Ps in termsof the PIC, and the parallelism and the Maximal Effect of Deletion output the final derivationof Pseudogapping. The P-feature based on the probe-goal system also accounted for someslight grammatical difference of Pseudogapping involving double object constructions.
Given these discussions, the proposals presented in this paper have provided a new
analysis of these three elliptical constructions, suggesting, against the conventional
assumption, that a non-constituent deletion is a possible solution to derive ellipticalphenomena with remnants.

205

References
Abe, Jun and Hoshi, Hiroto (1997) “Gapping and P-Stranding,” Journal of East Asian
Linguistics 6, 101-136.
Abe, Jun (2015) The In-Situ Approach to Sluicing, John Benjamins, Amsterdam.
Abe, Jun and Hornstein Norbert (2012) “‘Lasnik-effect’ and String-vacuous ATB Movement,”
Ways of Structure Building, ed. by Myriam Uribe-Etxebarria and Vidal Valmala, 169205, Oxford University Press, Oxford.
Agbayani, Brain (2006) “Pied-Piping, Feature Movement, and wh-subjects,” Wh-Movement:
Moving On, ed. by Lisa Lai-Shen Chen and Norbert Corver, MIT Press, Cambridge, MA.
Arimoto, Masatake and Keiko Murasugi (2005) Sokubaku to Sakujyo (Binding and Deletion),
Kenkyusha, Tokyo.
Baker, Carl Lee. (1970) "Notes on the Description of English Questions: The Role of an
Abstract Question Morpheme,” Foundations of Language 6, 197-219.
Baltin, Mark (2007) “The Position of Adverbials,” Phrasal and Clausal Architecture, ed. by
Simin Karinii. Vida Samiian, and Wendy K. Wilkins, 25-39, John Benjamins,
Amsterdam.
Barss, Andrew, and Howard Lasnik (1986) “A Note on Anaphora and Double Objects,”
Linguistic Inquiry 17: 347-354.
Bolinger, Dwight (1978) “Asking more than One Thing at a Time,” Questions, ed. by Henry
Hiz, 151-163, Kluwer, Dordrecht.
Bošković, Željko (2014) “Now I’m a Phase, now I’m not a Phase: On the Availability of
Phases with extraction and ellipsis,” Linguistic Inquiry 45, 27-89.
Chao, Wynn (1987) On Ellipsis, Doctoral dissertation, University of Massachusetts, Amherst.
Chomsky, Noam (1955) The Logical Structure of Linguistic Theory, MS, Harvard University,
Cambridge, MA.
Chomsky, Noam (1957) Syntactic Structures, Mouton, The Hague.
Chomsky, Noam (1965) Aspects of the Theory of Syntax, MIT Press, Cambridge, MA.
206

Chomsky, Noam (1972) “Some Empirical Issues in the Theory of Transformational Grammar,”
The Goals of Linguistic Theory, ed. by Stanley Peters, 63-130, Prentice-Hall, Englewood
Cliffs, NJ.
Chomsky, Noam (1986a) Knowledge of Language: Its Nature, Origin, and Use, Praeger, NewYork.
Chomsky, Noam (1986b) Barriers, MIT Press, Cambridge, MA.
Chomsky, Noam (1988) Generative Grammar: Its Basis, Development and Prospects, Studies
in English Linguistics and Literature, Special Issue, Kyoto University of Foreign Studies.
Chomsky, Noam (1993) “A Minimalist Program for Linguistic Theory,” The View from
Building 20, 1- 52, ed. by Kenneth Hale and Samuel Jay Keyser, MIT Press, Cambridge,
MA.
Chomsky, Noam (1994) “Bare Phrase Structure,” MIT Occasional Papers in Linguistics 5,MIT, Cambridge, MA.
Chomsky, Noam (1995) The Minimalist Program, MIT Press, Cambridge, MA.
Chomsky, Noam (1998) “Some Observations on Economy in Generative Grammar,” Is BestGood Enough? Optimality and Competition in Syntax, ed. by Pilar Barbosa, Danny Fox,
Paul Hagstrom, Martha McGinnis, and David Pesetsky, 115-127, MIT Press, Cambridge,
MA.
Chomsky, Noam (2000) “Minimalist Inquiries: The framework,” Step by Step: Essays on
Minimalist Syntax in Honor of Howard Lasnik, ed. by Roger Martin, David Michaels,
and Juan Uriagereka, 89-155, MIT Press, Cambridge, MA.
Chomsky, Noam (2001) “Derivation by Phase,” Ken Hale: A Life in Language, ed. by
Michael Kenstowicz, 1-52, MIT Press, Cambridge, MA
Chomsky, Noam (2004) “Beyond Explanatory Adequacy,” Structures and beyond, The
Cartography of Syntactic Structures Vol. 3, ed. by Adriana Belletti, Oxford
University Press, Oxford.
Chomsky, Noam (2005) “Three Factors in Language Design,” Linguistic Inquiry 36, 1-22.

207

Chomsky, Noam (2007) “Approaching UG from Below,” Interfaces + Recursion =Language?: Chomsky's Minimalism and the View from Syntax-Semantics, ed. by Uli
Sauerland and Hans-Martin Gartner, 1-29, Mouton de Gruyter, Berlin.
Chomsky, Noam (2008) “On Phases,” Foundational Issues in Linguistic Theory, ed. byRobert Freidin, Carlos P. Otero, and Maria L. Zubizarretta, 133-166, MIT Press,
Cambridge, MA.
Chomsky, Noam (2013) “Problems of Projection,” Lingua 130, 33-49.
Chomsky, Noam (2015a) Aspects of the Theory of Syntax: 50th Anniversary Edition with a
New Preface by the Author, MIT Press, Cambridge, MA.
Chomsky, Noam (2015b) “Problems of Projection: Extensions,” Structures, Strategies andBeyond: Studies in Honour of Adriana Belletti, ed. by Elisa Di Domenico, Cornelia
Hamann, and Simona Matteini, 3-16, John Benjamins, Amsterdam.
Chomsky, Noam (2017a) “The Language Capacity: Architecture and Evolution,”
Psychonomic Bulletin & Review 24, 200-203.
Chomsky, Noam (2017b) “Puzzles about Phases,” MS.
Chomsky, Noam, Ángel J. Gallego, and Denis Ott (2017) “Generative Grammar and theFaculty of Language: Insights, Questions, and Challenges, Version 2.” MS. (To appear as
Chomsky (2019) Generative Syntax: Questions, Crossroads, and Challenges, Special
issues of Catalan Journal of Linguistics, 229-261).
Chung, Sandra (2005) “Sluicing and the Lexicon: The Point of No Return,” The 31st Annual
Meeting of the Berkley Linguistic Society, University of California, Berkley, CA.
Chung Sandra (2013) “Syntactic Identity in Sluicing: How Much and Why,” Linguistic Inquiry,
44, 1-44.
Chung, Sandra, William Ladusaw, and James McCloskey (1995) “Sluicing and Logical Form,”
Natural Language and Semantics 3: 239-282.
Culicover, Peter and Ray Jackendoff (2005) Syntax Made Simple(r), Oxford University Press,
New York.

208

Epstein, Samuel D., Hisatsugu Kitahara, and Daniel Seely (2017) “Successive Cyclic WhMovement without Successive Cyclic Crashing,” Paper read at The 10th ELSJInternational Spring Forum 2017, at Meiji Gakuin University, Shirokane Campus, on
April 23rd 2017.
Erteschik, Nomi (1973) On the nature of island constraints, Doctoral dissertation, MIT.
Fiengo, Robert and Robert May (1994) Indices and Identity, MIT Press, Cambridge, MA.
Foder, Janet Dean and Ivan Sag (1982) “Referential and Quantificational Indefinites,”
Linguistics and Philosophy 5, 355-398.
Fox, Danny (2000) Economy and Semantic Interpretation, MIT Press, Cambridge, MA.
Fox, Danny and David Pesetsky (2004) “Cyclic Linearization of Syntactic Structure,” MS,MIT, Cambridge, MA.
Fox, Danny and David Pesetsky (in prep.) “Cyclic Linearization and the Typology ofMovement,” MS, MIT, Cambridge, MA.
Fox, Danny and Howard Lasnik (2003) “Successive Cyclic Movement and Island Repair: The
Difference between Sluicing and VP Ellipsis,” Linguistic Inquiry 34, 143-154.
Gengel, Kirsten (2013) Pseudogapping and Ellipsis, Oxford University Press, Oxford.
Greenberg, Joseph (1966) “Some Universals of Grammar with Particular Reference to theOrder of Meaningful Elements,” Universals of Language, ed. by Joseph Greenberg, 73113, MIT Press, Cambridge, MA.
Grano, Thomas and Howard Lasnik (2018) “How to Neturalize a Finite Clause Boundary:Phase Theory and the Grammar of Bound Pronouns,” Linguistic Inquiry 49, 465-499.
Halliday, Michael Alexander Kirkwood, and Ruqaiya Hasan (1973) Cohesionin Spoken andWritten English, Longmans, London.
Hankamer, Jorge and Ivan A. Sag (1976) “Deep and Surface Anaphora,” Linguistic Inquiry 7,
391-426.
Hartman, Jeremy (2011) “The Semantic Uniformity of Traces: Evidence from Ellipsis
Parallelism,” Linguistic Inquiry 42, 367-388.

209

Hasegawa, Hiroshi (2007) “Swiping Involves Preposition Stranding, not Pied-piping,” GLOW
30.
Heim, Irene (1982) The Semantics of Definite and Indefinite NPs, Doctoral dissertation,
University of Massachusetts, Amherst.
Heim, Irene, and Angelika Kratzer (1998) Semantics in Generative Grammar, Blackwell,
Oxford.
Higginbotham, James and Robert May (1981) “Questions, Quantifiers and Crossing,” The
Linguistic Review 1, 41-79.
Hirai, Daisuke (2001) “Categorial Status of Control Infinitival Complements,” IVY 34, 59-81,
The Society of English Literature and Linguistics, Nagoya University, Nagoya.
Hirai, Daisuke (2004) “Control Infinitives and Two Types of CP Phases,” English Linguistics
21, 241-264, Tokyo.
Hirai, Daisuke (2007) “A Minimalist Analysis of Sluicing,” Acta Humanistica et Scientifica
Universitis Sangio Kyotiensis, Humanities Series 37, 31-49, Kyoto Sangyo University,
Kyoto.
Hirai, Daisuke (2008) “A Minimalist Approach to pseudo-gapping,” Kinki (Kindai)
University Department of Language Education Bulletin, Vol. 8, No.2, pp. 75-92, Kinki
Kindai University, Osaka.
Hirai, Daisuke (2009) “A Minimalist Approach to Sluicing,” Ivy Never Sere, ed. by Masachiyo
Amano et.al., 303-320, Eichosya, Tokyo.
Hirai, Daisuke (2014) “Sakujyo Gensyou wo Megutte-Sluicing wo Chuushin-ni (OnPhenomenon of Deletion -With Special Reference to Sluicing- ),” Seisei Bunpou no
Kiseki to Tenbou (The History and Future of Generative Grammar), ed. by Naoyuki
Ono, Makoto Kondo, Takeo Fujikura, Kazumi Matsuoka, Koji Fujimoto, 186-202,
Kinseido, Tokyo.
Hirai, Daisuke (2015) “Silence Speaks -A Minimalist Analysis of Multiple Sluicing-,” Kindai
University Center for Liberal Arts and Foreign Language Education Journal, Foreign
Language Edition 6 (2), 21-41, Kindai University, Osaka.
210

Hirai, Daisuke (2016) “‘MaxElide’ nikansuru Ikutsukano Oboegaki” (Some Notes on‘MaxElide’), Kindai University Center for Liberal Arts and Foreign Language
Education Journal, Foreign Language Edition 7 (2), 103-117, Kindai University,
Osaka.
Hirai, Daisuke (2017) “On Multiple Sluicing,” JELS 34, 23-29.
Hornstein, Norbert (1984) Logic as Grammar, MIT Press, Cambridge, MA.
Hornstein, Norbert (1995) Logical Form: From GB to Minimalism, Blackwell, Oxford.
Huang, C-T. James (1982) Logical Relations in Chinese and the Theory of Grammar, Doctoral
dissertation, MIT.
Jackendoff, Ray (1971) “Gapping and Related Rules,” Linguistic Inquiry 2, 21-35.
Jayaseelan, Karattuparambil A. (1990) “Incomplete VP Deletion and Gapping,” Linguistic
Analysis, 20, 64-81.
Johnson, Kyle (2000) “How Far Will Quantifers Go?,” Step by Step: Essays on Minimalist
Syntax in Honor of Howard Lasnik, ed. by Roger Martin, David Michaels, andJuan

Uriagereka, 187-210, MIT Press, Cambridge, MA.
Kamp, Hans (1984) “A Theory of Truth and Semantic Representation,” Truth, Interpretation
and Information, ed. by Jeroen Groenendijk, Teo Janssen, and Martin Stockhof, 277-322,
Foris Publications, Dordrecht.
Karttunenn, Lauri (1977) “Syntax and Semantics of Questions,” Linguistics and Philosophy 13-44.
Katz, Jerrold and Paul Postal (1964) An Integrated Theory of Linguistic Descriptions, MIT
Press, Cambridge, MA.
Kayne, Richard (1985) “Principles of Particle Constructions,” Grammatical Representation,
ed. by Jacquline Guéron, Hans-Georg Obenauer, and Jean-Yves Pollock, 101-140, Foris
Publications, Dordrecht.
Kimura, Hiroko (2010) “A wh-in-situ Strategy for Sluicing,” English Linguistics 27 (1), 43-59.

211

Koizumi, Masatoshi (1993) “Object Agreement Phrases and the Split VP Hypothesis,” Papers
on Case and Agreement I: MIT Working Paper of Linguistics 18, ed. by Jonathan D.
Bobaljik and Colin Phillips, 99-148, MIT, Cambridge, MA.
Koizumi, Masatoshi (1995) Phrase Structure in Minimalist Syntax, Doctoral dissertation, MIT,
Cambridge, MA.
Koopman, Hilda and Anna Szabolcsi (2000) Verbal Complexes, MIT Press, Cambridge, MA.
Kuroda, Shigeyuki (1965) Generative Grammatical Studies in the Japanese langage, Ph.D.
Dissertation, MIT.
Larson, Bradley (2012) “Sprouting Anew: Fragment Answers, and Here’s Why,” CLS 48.
Larson, Richard (1988) “On the Double Object Construction,” Linguistic Inquiry 19, 335-391.
Lasnik, Howard (1995) “A Note on Pseudogapping,” Minimalist Analysis, 151-173, Blackwell,
Oxford.
Lasnik, Howard (2001) “When can you save a structure by destroying it?” Proceedings of theNorth East Linguistic Society 31, 301-320.
Lasnik, Howard (2010) “On Ellipsis: Is Material That Is Phonetically Absent but Semantically
Present Present or Absent Syntactically?,” Memory, Mind and Language, 221-242, ed. by
H. Götzche, Cambridge Scholars Publishing.
Lasnik, Howard (2014) “Multiple Sluicing in English?,” Syntax 17, 1-20.
Lasnik, Howard and Mamoru Saito (1992) Move α, MIT Press, Cambridge, MA.
Lebeaux, David (1988) Language Acquisition and the Form of the Grammar, Doctoral
dissertation, University of Massachusetts, Amherst.
Levin, Lori (1982) “Sluicing: A Lexical Interpretation Procedure,” The Mental Representationof Grammatical Relations, ed. by J. Bresnan, 590-654, MIT Press, Cambridge, MA.
Levin, Nancy (1978) “Some Identity-of-sense Deletions Puzzles Me. Do They You?,”
Proceedings of the Fourteen Annual Meeting of the Chicago Linguistic Society, 229-240,
Chicago Linguistic Society.
Levin, Nancy (1979) Main Verb Ellipsis in Spoken English, Doctoral dissertation, Ohio State
University, Columbus, (Published in 1986 by Garland, New York).
212

Lobeck, Anne (1995) Ellipsis: Functional Heads, Licensing, and Identification, Oxford
University Press, Oxford.
Matsuyama, Testuya (1998) “Shugo Tougyo Doushi Hobun no Toumeisei no Kouka ni Tuite(On Effects of Transparency of Complements of Subject Control Verbs),” Proceedingsof JELS 15, 101-110.
Merchant, Jason (2001) The Syntax of Silence: Sluicing, Islands, and the Theory of Ellipsis,
Oxford University Press, Oxford.
Merchant, Jason (2002) “Swiping in Germanic,” Studies in Comparative Germanic Syntax,
ed. by Jan-Wouter Zwart and Werner Abraham, 289-315, John Benjamins, Amsterdam.
Merchant, Jason (2008) “Variable Island Repair under Ellipsis,” Topics in Ellipsis, ed. by Kyle
Johnson, 132‒153, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.
Merchant, Jason (2013) “Voice and Ellipsis,” Linguistic Inquiry 44, 77-108.
Moltmann, Friederike, and Anna Szabolcsi (1994) “Scope Interaction with Pair-list
Quantifiers,” NELS 24, 381-395.
Moro, Andrea (1997) The Raising of Predicates: Predicative Noun Phrases and the Theoryof Clause Structure, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.
Nakajima, Heizo (1984) “Comp as a SUBJECT,” The Linguistic Review 4, 121-152.
Nakajima, Heizo (1986) “Apparent Unboundedness in the want-equi Construction,”
Metropolitan Linguistics, 6, 14-30, Tokyo Metropolitan University Linguistic Circle.
Nishigauchi, Taisuke (1986) Quantification in Syntax, Ph.D. dissertation, University of
Massachusetts.
Nishigauchi, Taisuke (1990) Quantification in the Theory of Grammar, Kluwer, Dordrecht.
Nishigauchi, Taisuke (1998) “‘Multiple Sluicing’ in Japanese and the Functional Nature of
wh-phrases,” Journal of East Asian Linguistics 7, 121-152.
Nishigauchi, Taisuke (1999) Ronrikouzou to Bunpouriron -Nichi Eigo no WH Gensyou(Logical Structures and Grammatical Theory -WH Phenomena in English andJapanese-), Kuroshio, Tokyo.
Nishikawa, Yoshitaka (1990) “Evidence for the Existence of AGRP: English Heavy NP Shift,”213

English Linguistics, 7, 14-31.
Nissenbaum, Jonathan (2000) Investigations of Covert Phrase Movement, Doctoral
dissertation, MIT.
Okuno, Tadanori and Yoshiki Ogawa (2002) Kyokusei to Sayouiki (Polarity and Scope),
Kenkyusha, Tokyo.
Partee, Barbara (1973) “Some Transformational Extensions of Montague Grammar,” Journalof Philosophical Logic 2, 509-534.
Pesetsky, David (1987) “Wh-In-Situ: Movement and Unselective Binding,” The
Reperesentation of (In)definiteness, ed. By Eric Reuland and Alice ter Meulen, 98-129,
MIT Press, Cambridge, MA.
Radford, Andrew (2009) An Introduction to English Sentence Structure, Cambridge University
Press, Cambridge.
Reinhart, Tanya (1997) “Quantifier Scope: How Labor is Divided between QR and Choice
Functions,” Linguistics and Philosophy 20, 335-397.
Reinhart, Tanya (2006) Interface Strategies Optimal and Costly Computations,
Richards, Norvin (1997) What Moves Where When in Which Language?, MIT Working
Paper in Linguistics, MIT Press, Cambridge, MA.
Richards, Norvin (2001) Movement in Language: Interactions and Architectures, Oxford
University Press, Oxford.
Rizzi, Luigi (2006) “On the Form of Chains: Criterial Positions and ECP Effects,” WhMovement: Moving On, ed. by Lisa Lai-Shen Cheng and Norbert Corver, 97-133, MIT
Press. Cambridge, MA.
Rizzi, Luigi (2010) “On Some Properties of Criterial Freezing,” The Complementizer Phase:
Subjects and Operations, ed. by E. Phoevos Panagiotidis, 17-32, Oxford University Press,
Oxford.
Roberts, Ian (1997) “Restructuring, Head-movement, and Locality,” Linguistic Inquiry28,
423-460.

214

Ross, John (1967) Constraints on Variables in Syntax, Doctoral dissertation, MIT,
Cambridge, MA.
Ross, John (1969) “Guess Who?” CLS 5, 252-286.
Rooth, Mats (1992) “Ellipsis Redundancy and reduction redundancy,” Proceedings of the
Stuttgart Ellipsis Workshop 29, ed. by Steve Berman and Arild Hestvik, Heidelberg: IBM
Germany.
Sag, Ivan (1976) Deletion and Logical Form, Garland, New York.
Selkirk, Elizabeth O. (1982) The Syntax of Words, MIT Press, Cambridge, MA
Schwarzschild, Roger (1999) “Giveness, Avoid F, and Other Constraints on the Placement of
Accent,” Natural Language Semantics 7, 141-177.
Shima, Etsuro (2015) Sryouryaku Gensyou to Bunpou Riron (Elliptical Phenomena andTheoru of Grammar), Kaitakusha, Tokyo.
Sprouse, Jon (2005) “The Accent Projection Principle: Why the Hell Not?,” Paper presented at
Penn Linguistic Colloquium 29, University of Pennsylvania.
Stowell, Timothy (1981) Origins of Phrase Structures, Ph.D. Dissertation, MIT.
Takahashi, Daiko (1994) “Sluicing in Japanese,” Journal of East Asian Linguistics 3, 265-300.
Takahashi, Shoichi, and Danny Fox (2005) “MaxElide and the Re-binding Problem,”Proceedings from Semantics and Linguistic Theory 15, ed. by Effi Georgala and Jon
Howell, 223‒240, CLC Publishing.
Tyler, Matthew (2017) “Swiping without Sluicing,” University of Pennsylvania Working
Papers in Linguistics 23, 291-300.
Yoshida, Masaya (2004) “Gapping Inside NP?,” University of Maryland Working Papers in
Linguistics Vol 13, 245-262, University of Maryland.
Wasow, Thomas (1972) Anaphoric Relations in English, Doctoral dissertation, MIT.
Wilder, Chris (1994) “Coordination, ATB, and Ellipsis,” Groninger Arbeiten zur
Germanistischen Linguitik 37, 291 - 331.
Williams, Edwin (1977) “Discourse and Logical Form,” Linguistic Inquiry 8, 101-139.

215

Williams, Edwin (1986) “A Reassignment of the Function of LF,” Linguistic Inquiry 17, 265299.

Newspapers
Kurshudyan, Isabelle, (2018, June 8) ‘All Champs,’ The Washington Post, D1.

216